JP6068319B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a plurality of display units.

  A gaming machine is known that executes a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. ing. In such a gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine including a second display unit that performs display related to a game effect in addition to a first display unit that displays a variable display game (see, for example, Patent Document 1). .

JP2013-128605A

  However, even if a plurality of display units are provided, it has not been possible to improve the interest by simply changing the display on each display unit.

  An object of the present invention is to improve interest in a gaming machine including a plurality of display units.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 executes a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player
A first display device and a second display device capable of displaying information about a game;
Display control means for controlling display on the first display device and the second display device,
In the variable display game, the display control means
The variable display game is displayed on the first display device, and the first mode of displaying a predetermined image related to the variable display game on the second display device is executed, and then displayed on the second display device. and the predetermined image while moving in the first display device, the first display device the variable display game that has been displayed on the move to the second display device, displays the then on the second display device The second mode of moving the variable display game to the first display device is executed, and the variable display game displayed on the first display device at the start of the variable display game is displayed on the first display device. And the first effect of ending the variable display game,
A second effect of ending the variable display game in a state where the variable display game is displayed on the first display device without executing the second aspect after executing the first aspect;
Can produce any of the following
The first effect or the second effect is executed according to an expected value at which the variable display game has the special result .

Here, the gaming machines include all gaming machines that use gaming balls such as pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, slot machines that use medals, slot machines that use gaming balls, etc. All slot machines are included.
Examples of the display device include a display device using liquid crystal, LED, EL, or the like.

  According to the present invention, an unprecedented effect that a specific display moves between a plurality of display devices can be performed, and an interest can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a figure which shows an example of the bit transposition pattern of a random number. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the main prize ball remaining number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / error monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an error check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1). It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 2). It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a production mode information check process. It is a flowchart explaining a time shortening fluctuation frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 2 (at the time end of time reduction). It is a figure explaining an upper university winning opening opening / closing pattern. It is a figure explaining a lower big prize opening opening / closing pattern. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a solenoid information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 3 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a usual game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a normal process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric power remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining an end process per common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout main process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout main process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment related data reception process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout apparatus control start determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning ball control start determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart explaining a prize ball payout start process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning ball payout termination process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning ball payout number update process. It is a flowchart explaining 1st main processing. It is a flowchart explaining command reception interruption processing. It is a flowchart explaining 1st scene control processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart explaining a change time setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a change time management process. It is a flowchart explaining 2nd main processing. It is a flowchart explaining V blank interruption processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a display example at an arrangement position B. 10 is a diagram illustrating a display example at an arrangement position A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a display example at an arrangement position C. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a display example at an arrangement position D. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a sub display apparatus movement process. It is a figure explaining an example of production. It is a figure for demonstrating arrangement | positioning of the display apparatus in a 1st modification, Comprising: (a) The perspective view seen from the front side, (b) It is side part sectional drawing. It is a figure explaining the example of a display with the sub display device seen from the upper part of the stage part in the 1st modification. It is a figure for demonstrating arrangement | positioning of the display apparatus in a 2nd modification, Comprising: (a), (b) The perspective view seen from the front side, (c) It is side sectional drawing. It is a figure for demonstrating arrangement | positioning of the display apparatus in a 3rd modification, Comprising: (a) Side part sectional drawing, (b), (c) It is a front view. It is a figure for demonstrating arrangement | positioning of the display apparatus in another example of a 3rd modification, Comprising: (a) Top view, (b), (c) It is a front view. It is the perspective view seen from the front side for demonstrating arrangement | positioning of the display apparatus in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating arrangement | positioning of the display apparatus in a 5th modification, and a half mirror, Comprising: (a), (c) The perspective view seen from the front side, (b), (d) It is side sectional drawing. is there. It is the perspective view and side part sectional view seen from the front side. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the display in the main display apparatus in a 5th modification, and the image of a half mirror, Comprising: (a), (c) The perspective view seen from the front side, (b), (d) Main It is a front view of the display in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of the half mirror in a 5th modification, and a sub display apparatus, and how to see from a player. It is a figure explaining the example of a display with the sub display apparatus seen from the upper part of the stage part in a 6th modification. In another example of the sixth modification, (a) a front view of a variable winning device, (b) a diagram for explaining a region of a floor, and (c) a diagram for explaining a display on a sub display device. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of the sub display apparatus in another example of a 6th modification. It is the perspective view seen from the front side for demonstrating arrangement | positioning of the display apparatus in a 7th modification, and an accessory apparatus. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the prefetch notice process in a 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production button in a 7th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in another example of the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in another example of the 7th modification. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of (a) front view, (b) side part sectional view, and (c) sub display device and accessory device of the center case in the 8th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 8th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 8th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in another example of the 8th modification. It is a figure explaining the decoration special figure start memory display in a 9th modification. It is a figure explaining the example of a display of the decoration special figure starting memory display in a 9th modification. It is a figure explaining the example of a display of the decoration special figure starting memory display in a 9th modification. It is a figure explaining the example of a display of the decoration special figure starting memory display in a 9th modification.

  DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to a main body frame (outer frame) 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. A glass frame 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (inner frame) 12.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for paying out abnormality notification are provided in the upper part of the glass frame 15. Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 with a built-in lamp and the like for emitting light for decoration and production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Yes. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and an upper plate from which game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out. A ball outlet 22, a lower tray 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a ball hitting device, and the like are provided. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
Further, an effect button 25 is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21 as an operation means for receiving an operation input from the player. The effect button 25 includes an effect button switch 25a serving as a detecting means capable of detecting a player's operation or action. Note that the operation means and the detection means are not limited to this, and may be one that detects a player's operation such as a cross key, lever, touch panel, or one that detects a player's operation such as an infrared sensor.

  Further, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card is discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25, the player's operation is caused to intervene in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) in the main display device 41 (see FIG. 2) or the sub display device 600. Production can be performed.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case 40 provided with a main display device 41 and a sub display device 600 is arranged substantially at the center. The main display device 41 and the sub display device 600 are attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the main display device 41 and the sub display device 600, and is formed so as to protrude forward from the display surface of the main display device 41 and the sub display device 600. It is formed so that it is difficult for game balls to jump from 32.

  The main display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display), a CRT (CRT), or the like. In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the main display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  The sub display device 600 is also composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), a CRT (CRT), and the like, and relates to a game such as a character that produces a special figure variation display game and a background image that enhances the production effect. Information is displayed. As shown in FIG. 2, the sub display device 600 is configured to be movable to a predetermined position indicated by a dotted line around the main display device 41 and a state of overlapping the front of the main display device 41.

  The sub-display device 600 may be operated in any configuration. For example, a guide rail is provided along the movement path of the sub-display device 600, and the motor that forms the drive source and the sub-display device 600 are armed. There are a system in which the belts are connected and driven, a system in which a belt is arranged along the guide rail, the sub display device 600 is connected to the belt, and the belt is driven by a driving source. Further, a mechanism for driving the sub display device 600 up and down and a mechanism for driving it left and right may be provided, and the sub display device 600 may be moved to a predetermined position by cooperation of these mechanisms.

  Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the board | presentation apparatus 44 (refer FIG. 4) which performs the effect of a game by operating is provided in the upper part and right part in the center case 40. Furthermore, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Also, below the center case 40, there is provided a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure variation display game. The game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3). In the right part of the center case 40, an ordinary variable winning device (with a second starting winning opening (starting winning area)) provided with a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in and a state in which it is difficult to flow in, is provided. 37) is installed.

  The movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is normally in an upright state and holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which a game ball cannot flow. Then, when the result of the general fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the movable member 37b is centered on the lower portion as indicated by the dotted line by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as the driving device. It tilts to the right and can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) where the game ball can easily flow into the normal variation winning device 37. A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that a game ball can be won even in the closed state, and in the closed state, the game ball may be harder to win than in the open state.

  Further, below the start winning port 36, a first special variable winning device (first big winning port, lower grand winning, which can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure display game. Mouth) 38 is provided.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is changed from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to the open state (a state advantageous to the player). In other words, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. By converting the closed prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of gaming balls into the winning prize opening, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. In addition, a lower count switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the inside of the big winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two lower count switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the big prize opening is detected by one of the lower count switches 38a. By providing a plurality of lower count switches 38a as described above, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening. Further, below the first special variable winning device 38, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  Also, in the lower right of the center case 40, a second special variable winning device (second big prize opening, upper big prize winning) which can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 39) is provided. The second special variation winning device 39 also has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is changed from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to the open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable prize winning device 39 includes, for example, a big winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 39c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. By converting the closed prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of gaming balls into the winning prize opening, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. Note that an upper count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is disposed inside the special winning opening (winning area). In the special game state, one of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is released, and which one is released is determined by the result mode (special result) of the special figure variable display game. Is done.

  In addition, a warp channel 47 that guides a game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the center case 40 is provided on the left side of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp channel 47 is guided to a stage portion 48 provided at the lower portion of the center case 40. A game ball bounced by a nail planted below the center case 40 can also flow into the stage portion 48.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the stage portion 48 has an inclined surface descending forward, and has a gentle arc shape in which both the left and right sides descend toward a position directly above the start winning opening 36, The position directly above the mouth 36 protrudes downward and is lower. The game ball that has flowed down the warp channel 47 is guided to the left end portion of the stage portion 48, flows forward while rolling left and right along the inclination, and falls from the front end of the stage portion 48 to the game area 32. Since the stage portion 48 has the lowest position directly above the start winning opening 36, the game ball that has flowed into the stage portion 48 wins the starting winning opening 36 with a high probability.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34 which form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and displaying various information.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. The second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display part (general figure display) 53 for the common figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the LED lamp Storage display units 54, 55, and 56 for informing the start memory number of each variable display game. Further, the collective display device 50 is turned on when a big hit occurs and a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator) 57 that notifies the occurrence of the big hit, and lights up when a short time state occurs to notify the occurrence of a short time state. A second gaming state display unit (second gaming state indicator) 58, and a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state) for displaying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. A status display (probability status display section) 59 and a round display section 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) are provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the main display device 41 is performing the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. When the result of the game is “out of place”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result form of out of play. A game result is displayed with a result form (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result form turned on.

  The normal display 53 displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the game result after a predetermined time, by blinking the lamp during the change and displaying the change. Further, the general figure hold display 56 displays the start memory number (= holding number) of the general figure start gate 34, which is the variation start condition of the general display, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of LEDs. For example, when the hold number is “0”, the lamps 1 to 3 are turned off, and when the hold number is “1”, only the lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of holdings is “2”, only the lamp 2 is turned on, and when the number of holdings is “3”, only the lamp 3 is turned on. When the number of hold is “4”, all the lamps 1 to 3 are turned on.

  The special figure 1 holding display 54 indicates the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking and lighting. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 indicates the start memory number (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting. Here, the number of starting memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 in the same lighting manner as the ordinary figure hold indicator 56.

  For example, the first gaming state display unit 57 turns off the lamp in a normal gaming state and turns on the lamp when a big hit has occurred. For example, the second gaming state display unit 58 turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp when the short time state occurs.

  The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 turns off the lamp when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, for example. If the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

  For example, the round display unit 60 turns off the lamp when not in the special gaming state, and turns on the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special gaming state. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 are won, or they flow into the outlet 30 a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and are discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port (the number of payouts) is increased. From the dispensing unit controlled by the dispensing control device 200 (see FIG. 3), the sheet is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the front frame 12. In other words, the normal start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 form a winning device that allows a ball flowing down the game area 32 to win. In addition, the payout unit serves as a payout device capable of paying out game media.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The memorized number of the usual figure start winnings is displayed on the universal figure holding display 56 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (win random number value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal chart start memory, and this random number value for hit determination is determined as a determination value. To determine the result of the normal map display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  The usual figure change display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed on a change display portion (common figure display) 53 constituted by LEDs. Makes identification information (general, normal). The general map display 53 is composed of a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as normal identification information. After this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed in a stopped state. You may do it. If the stop display of the usual figure change display game is a usual figure specifying result, it becomes a hit of the ordinary figure, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and normally fluctuates. The game ball that has won the winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 3). Are stored in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special chart start memory is displayed on the storage display section (the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the center. The main display device 41 or the sub display device 600 of the case 40 is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 receives the special prize 1 display 51 (variation display device) or the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display) based on the winning winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof. The first or second special figure variation display game is played on the device. The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which a main display device (image display device) 41 displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner. And as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the main display device 41 is also a special result mode.

  For example, the decoration special figure variation display game on the main display device 41 is a special variation symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers or the like on the main display device 41, a left variation display area (first special symbol), and a right variation display. In each of the region (second special symbol) and the middle variation display region (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed variation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the main display device 41 and the sub display device 600 perform a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effects such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is performed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the main display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently and simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the main display device 41. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is (Priority) to be executed.

  In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is subtracted by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable prize winning device 37) in a state that is not in the special game state or in the special game state, the start memory number is 1 if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number. By adding, one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number becomes 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch 38a, 39a is a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU section 110 receives signals (start winning detection signals) from a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and a proximity switch interface chip (proximity I / F) 121a in the input section 120. An inversion circuit 112 composed of an inverter or the like that is logically inverted and input to the gaming microcomputer 111 and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator are provided to generate a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the internal RAM of gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, power failure monitoring circuit and initialization switch, and the occurrence and recovery of power failure in game control device 100 A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal to be notified is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the initialization switch is turned on, and forcibly initializes information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. . Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. And, for example, a state in which a variable display by a plurality of variable display areas is maintained (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result forms are aligned. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of place). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  In addition, the CPU 111A selects one of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) or a special figure routine process (step A9) in a special figure game process to be described later. One fluctuation pattern table is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operation state (normal operation state or short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as a state, the number of start memories, etc., one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. To do. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  Although not shown, the payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. , Control for paying out a prize ball. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36 a in the start winning port 36, a start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to and supplied from a gate switch 34a in the start gate 34, a winning opening switch 35a, a lower count switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, and an upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39. There are provided interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b that receive a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and convert it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  The reason why the proximity I / F 121a and the proximity I / F 121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 121a is limited. The proximity I / F 121b is made smaller than the proximity I / F 121a in accordance with the number of input terminals that are insufficient, thereby reducing the cost. Note that the proximity I / F 121a having a necessary number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F 121b may not be provided.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a and the upper count switch 39a are the second input. Input to port 123. Of the outputs from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. In addition, a detection signal of a fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like is also input to the third input port 124. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 through the inverting circuit 112 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured as follows. The inversion circuit 112 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 detects that a signal from a micro switch or the like is input, and detects negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

  Therefore, when a micro switch is used as the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the detection signal can be directly input to the gaming microcomputer 111 without providing the inverting circuit 112. That is, when it is desired to directly input negative logic signals from the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the gaming microcomputer 111, the proximity switch cannot be used. As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes signals and payouts from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and a front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the control device 200, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow are fetched and supplied to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. One input port 122 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. The circuit 125 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 400, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once inputted to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 includes a first output port 131 that is connected to the data bus 140 and generates a 4-bit data signal to be output to the payout control device 200 and a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating validity / invalidity of the data. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 by parallel communication. The output unit 130 is provided with a buffer 132. This buffer 132 is arranged on the data communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300, and prevents the signal from being input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side, that is, one-way. This is to secure communication. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. A buffer may be provided for a signal output from the first output port 131 to the payout control device 200.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game store. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid 1) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the first special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid for opening the second special variable winning device 39). 2) A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / close data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening 39b and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. A driver (driving circuit) 138 a and a second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off driving signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135 and a fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and an external information signal that is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device is output to the external information terminal 71. A fourth driver 138d is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and thus ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 formed of an amusement chip (IC), as with the game microcomputer 111, and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1st CPU 311. , VDP (Video Display Processor) 313 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the main display device 41 and the sub display device 600 in accordance with commands and data from the 2nd CPU 312, various melody and sound effects, etc. A sound source LSI 314 that controls the output of sound for reproduction from the speakers 19a and 19b is provided.

  The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are connected to program ROMs 321 and 322 each composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by each CPU. Is connected to an image ROM 323 storing character images and video data, and a sound ROM 324 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation, instructs the video control microcomputer 312 about the contents of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 314 about the reproduced sound. Then, processing such as lighting of the decoration lamp, motor drive control, and production time management is executed. RAMs that provide work areas for the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are provided in the respective chips. Note that the RAM that provides the work area may be provided outside the chip.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are serially connected. Data transmission / reception is performed, and data transmission / reception is performed in parallel with the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and between the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the VDP 313. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial. The VDP 313 includes an ultra-high speed VRAM (video RAM) 313a used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 323, and a scaler for enlarging and reducing images. 313b, a signal conversion circuit 313c for generating a video signal to be transmitted to the main display device 41 and the sub display device 600 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method, and the like are provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 313 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the images of the main display device 41 and the sub display device 600 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the front frame 12 and the game board 30. . In addition, the VDP 313 notifies the video control microcomputer 312 that it is waiting to receive an interrupt signal INT0-n and a command or data from the video control microcomputer 312 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT is input. Further, the video control microcomputer 312 receives from the main control microcomputer 311 a synchronization signal SYNC that informs that the video control microcomputer 312 is operating normally and gives command transmission timing. A call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 in order to transmit and receive commands and data in the handshake method.

  Note that the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 uses a CPU that is faster or more expensive than the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311. By providing a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 separately from the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and sharing the processing, it is possible to display a fast moving image on a large screen that is difficult to achieve with the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 alone. The display can be displayed on the main display device 41 and the sub display device 600, and the increase in cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where two CPUs having the same processing capability as the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 are used. be able to. Also, by providing two CPUs, it becomes possible to separately develop the control programs for the two CPUs in parallel, thereby shortening the development period of the new model.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the special figure reservation number command, the special figure command, the change command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are received as production control command signals. . Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Is provided.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and the front frame 12. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided, and a game board 30 (including the periphery of the center case 40 and the sub display device 600) A board for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the main display device 41 or the sub display device 600, or the operable sub display device 600). Production motor / SOL control circuit 334, motor provided on the front frame 12 (for example, a motor for operating the moving light 16) Frame effect motor control circuit 335 for controlling the frame effect device 45 of the drive is provided. These control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps, motors and solenoids are connected to a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 340.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the front frame 12, an effect agent switch 44a for detecting the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, and a sub A switch input circuit 336 that detects the on / off state of the sub display device switch 601 that detects the position of the display device 600 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311, is provided on the front frame 12. An amplifier circuit 337a including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a and an amplifier circuit 337b for driving the speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12 are provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, DC12V for driving the main display device 41 and sub-display device 600 made of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V as the power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, DC18V for driving LEDs and speakers, and these direct currents It is configured to generate a voltage of NDC 24V that is used as a reference for the voltage or to turn on the power supply monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 or the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312, DC 3. The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 3V or DC 1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a video control microcomputer 312, a VDP 313, a sound source LSI 314, control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps and motors, speakers, and the like. Are supplied to the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b, which are in a reset state. In this embodiment, a general-purpose port of the video control microcomputer 312 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 313. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the video control microcomputer 312 and the VDP 313 can be improved.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining whether or not the normal variation display game is missed is performed. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display device, a process for displaying a general symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of this general-purpose fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general-purpose display, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, , 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is missed is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is missed is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the main display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, the production control device 300 controls production state setting, sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, light emission of various LEDs, and display on the sub display device 600 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Perform processing. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. To perform the process. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A opens, for example, the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b or the opening / closing of the second special variable winning device 39 by the large winning opening solenoid 39b. Control is performed to open the door 39c and allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. Opening the grand prize opening until such a condition is achieved is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) is performed in which this is repeated (repeated) a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times, 11 times, or 2 times). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the high probability state is reached, the high probability state continues until the next special result mode is derived.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the normal variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short time operation state, and the normal variation winning device per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. The opening time of 37 is controlled so as to be substantially increased.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal map change time) to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time (for example, 10,000 ms is 1000 ms). Further, in the short-time state, it is possible to control so that the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game becomes a second stop time (for example, 704 ms) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms). It is. Further, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being the winning result, the first opening time (for example, 100 ms) in which the opening time (general power opening time) is the normal state. It is possible to perform control so that the second opening time is longer (for example, 1352 ms). Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game. It is possible to set the number of second releases (for example, 4 times). In the short time state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Further, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 5, an interrupt vector setting process (step S1) is first performed to set a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs. In step S2), a stack pointer setting process (step S3) is performed for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. Next, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S4), and an interrupt mode setting process (step S5) for setting an interrupt process mode is performed.

  Thereafter, processing for setting a power supply delay timer is performed (step S6). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch is reliably detected by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. it can. In other words, if the initialization switch state is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch is continuously operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to do. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power supply delay timer (step S6), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S7 to S11) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step S7), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S8).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S8; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S7 (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S9; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S8). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S9; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is awaited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S8; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S10), and the timer value is 0. Is determined (step S11). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step S11; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S7). When the timer value is 0 (step S11; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S12). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S13).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the production control device 300 in this embodiment) is set (step S14), and the first input port read first is set. It is determined from the state of 122 whether the initialization switch in the power supply device 400 has been turned on (step S15).

  If the initialization switch is OFF (step S15; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (step S16). S16; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (step S17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18). It is determined whether the checksums coincide with each other (step S19). If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the process proceeds to step S20 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S15; Y), or when the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S19; N), the process proceeds to step S25 in FIG. 6 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step S20 of FIG. 6, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S20). The areas to be initialized here are areas related to a power failure recovery inspection area, a checksum area, and error fraud monitoring. Thereafter, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S21). If the probability is not high (step S21; N), steps S22 and S23 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, when the probability is high (step S21; Y), the on-information is saved in the high-probability notification flag area (step S22), and the high-probability notification LED (error indicator) provided in the collective display device 50 is turned on, for example. (Lighting) Data is saved in the segment area (step S23). And the command at the time of the power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the below-mentioned special figure game process rationally is transmitted to the production | presentation control apparatus 300 (step S24), and it progresses to step S29.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S15, S16, S17, S19 to step S25, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared (step S25), and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. (Step S26), the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (Step S27). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Then, a command for turning on the power is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S28), and the process proceeds to step S29.

  It should be noted that the power failure recovery command transmitted in step S24 and the power-on command transmitted in step S28 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and a decoration feature indicating the number of holds in FIGS. 1 includes a hold number command, a decorative special figure 2 hold number command, and a probability information command indicating a probability state. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the recovery screen command is used. If the customer is waiting when the power is turned off, the customer waiting demo command is used. When initialized at power-on, a power-on command is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time-saving count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving state are included.

  In step S29, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S29, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S30). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. For example, as shown in FIG. 7, the bit transposition pattern is a bit arrangement different from the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the bit transposition on the upper stage) in a predetermined order (the arrangement after the bit transposition on the lower stage). ) Is a pattern that defines how to replace the data when it is stored. By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number) 2) After saving the initial value (start value) of a random number (winning random number) for determining the normal hit in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S31), the interruption is permitted (step S32). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as an initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S33) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock. The big hit symbol random number and the hit random number have the same period as the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. Is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing). In the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number makes a round. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a random number that is updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S33, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S34), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step S35). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S35; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S33). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S33) (step S32), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process in step S33 includes a method of performing an initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of value random number update processing, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to disable interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S35; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S34 (step S36). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S36; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S35). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S36; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S37), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S38) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure recovery inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 1 (step S39), and the power failure recovery inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 2 (step S40). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S41) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S42), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S43) ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure recovery inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutdown is calculated, so that whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up can be checked. This can be determined when the power is turned on again.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 8 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S18 and S41) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation has not ended (step S57: N), the process returns to step S54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S57: Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 9 shows the initial value random number update process (step S33) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), the big hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step S62), and the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is updated by +1 (step S61). S63), the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the usual game. The “big hit symbol initial value random number 1” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit symbol stop symbol of the special figure 1, and the “big hit symbol initial value random number 2” is a symbol that determines the big hit symbol stop value of the special figure 2 It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 10 is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, a register saving process (step S101) is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is first transferred to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, input processing (step S102) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S103) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) and the like is performed.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S104), a random number update process 1 (step S105), and a random number update process 2 (step S106) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a, the upper count switch 39a, A prize opening switch / error monitoring process (step S107) for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened) is performed. Also, a special figure game process (step S108) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S110) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and that drives a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display a desired content, magnetic sensor switch 61 The magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111) for determining whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave, and the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S112) for determining whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 are performed. . Then, external information editing processing (step S113) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer. Subsequently, a process of clearing the interrupt request and declaring the end of the interrupt (step S114), a process of restoring the register data saved in step S101 (step S115), and a process of permitting the interrupt (step S115) Step S116) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S102) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S122).

  Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), unused bit data is prepared (step S124), and bit data to be inverted is prepared. (Step S125). Thereafter, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S126), the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. . Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, unused bit data is prepared (step S129), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S131), the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S132), and the switch reading process (step S133) is performed. The input process is terminated.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S144). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S149). Thereafter, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 and the different bit is 0 in the first and second reads (step S150), and the deterministic bit pattern and the port input state 2 are ANDed. The confirmation bit is set (step S151).

  Next, an unconfirmed bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first and second readings is set to 0 and a different bit is set to 1 (step S152), and the logic between the unconfirmed bit pattern and the final state at the time of the previous interrupt is generated. The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S154), exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken, and saved as a rising edge (step S155), The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process at a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the big prize opening solenoids 38b and 39b is synthesized and output (step S162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step S163). In step S164, the acquired data is output to the digit output port 136 (step S165). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S166), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (step S167).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 is loaded and combined and output to the external information output port 137 (step S168). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S169). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S170).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S171). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S172). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S173) and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the payout command transmission process, first, a check is made among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls (for example, three prize balls, ten prize balls, and 14 prize balls). It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the targeted winning number counter area (step S181). If there is no count number (step S181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting numbers in all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated.

  When it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S184), and the winning number counter area A payout command (negative logic data) corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, a strobe off timer for measuring the off time of the strobe signal indicating whether the data reading is valid or invalid (for example, the time for maintaining the low level, for example, 0.015 ms) is set (step S186), and is acquired in step S185. The payout command (negative logic data) and the off-state (low level) strobe signal are output to the port 131 (see FIG. 3) (step S187).

  Thereafter, the strobe off timer is updated by -1 (step S188), and it is determined whether the value of the strobe off timer is 0, that is, whether the off time set in step S186 has elapsed (step S189). If the value of the strobe off timer is not 0 (step S189; N), that is, if the off time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S187. If the value of the strobe off timer is 0 (step S189; Y), that is, if the off time has elapsed, a negative logic output remaining timer that counts the remaining output time (eg, 0.030 ms) of negative logic data is set. Setting is made (step S190).

  Next, a payout command (negative logic data) is output, and an on-state (high level) strobe signal is output to the port 131 (step S191). Then, the negative logic output remaining timer is updated by −1 (step S192), and it is determined whether the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the output time of the negative logic data set in step S190 has expired ( Step S193). When the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is not 0 (step S193; N), that is, when the output time of the negative logic data has not ended, the process returns to step S191. When the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is 0 (step S193; Y), that is, when the output time of the negative logic data is ended, the negative logic payout command data is inverted and the positive logic payout command is inverted. Data is generated (step S194).

  Next, a strobe on remaining timer for measuring the remaining strobe signal on time (high level time, for example, 0.015 ms) is set (step S195), and the payout command (positive logic data) generated in step S194 is set. The strobe signal in the on state (high level) is output to the port 131 (step S196). Thereafter, the remaining strobe-on timer is updated by -1 (step S197), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining strobe-on timer is 0, that is, whether the on-time set in step S195 has expired (step S198). If the value of the remaining strobe on timer is not 0 (step S198; N), that is, if the on-time has not expired, the process returns to step S196. Further, when the value of the remaining strobe on timer is 0 (step S198; Y), that is, when the on-time has expired, a positive logic output remaining timer that counts the remaining output time (eg, 0.030 ms) of the positive logic data. Is set (step S199).

  Thereafter, a payout command (positive logic data) is output, and an off state (low level) strobe signal is output to the port 131 (step S200). Then, the positive logic output remaining timer is updated by -1 (step S201), and it is determined whether the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the output time of the positive logic data set in step S199 has ended (step S201). Step S202). If the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is not 0 (step S202; N), that is, if the output time has not ended, the process returns to step S200. Further, when the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is 0 (step S202; Y), that is, when it is finished, information regarding the number of payout balls scheduled to be sent from the game control device 100 to the external device is set. The main winning ball remaining number update process (step S203) is performed, and the command transmission process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device 200 operates the payout device based on this payout command to pay out the game ball. As described above, by outputting negative logic payout command data and then outputting positive logic payout command data, the command receiving side reads and compares negative logic payout command data and positive logic payout command data. Thus, it can be determined whether or not a correct command has been received. For example, the negative logic payout command data received earlier is logically inverted and compared with the positive logic payout command data received later. By making a request to the game control apparatus 100, it becomes possible to receive an accurate command. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a control means for performing control for causing the payout device (payout unit) to pay out a predetermined number of game media based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition.

  Next, the main winning ball signal that is output to the external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled payout number, scheduled game medium payout number) generated by winning the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) will be described. To do.

  A game ball wins a prize opening provided in the game area 32 (starting prize opening 36, normal variation prize winning device 37, general prize winning mouth 35, first special variable prize winning device 38, second special variable prize winning device 39), With a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media such as game balls and medals when a predetermined payout condition such as the establishment of a specific prize (for example, a prize with a ball or an arrangement ball) is satisfied Every time the number of game media reaches a predetermined number, a signal is output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

  However, for example, when a large amount of game balls are won per unit time, such as during a big hit, and a lot of prize balls are paid out in accordance with this, a prize ball signal is sent to the external device after the completion of the payout. In the output, it is difficult for the external device to accurately grasp the number of winning balls (number of balls to be paid out) during the big hit.

  In other words, since there is a limit on the payout speed, the winning ball generated during the big hit may be paid out after the big hit, and a signal to the external device based on the payout of the winning ball is also transmitted after the big hit. For this reason, it is difficult for the external device to determine when the winning ball is generated. In recent years, due to the design of gaming machines, there are an increasing number of gaming machines that have a small lower plate that accepts paid-out game balls and those that do not have a lower plate, and overflow of paid-out game balls frequently occurs. In many cases, payments are temporarily suspended. As a result, the payout of the winning ball generated during the big hit is shifted after the end of the big hit, and a signal to the external device based on the payout of the winning ball is transmitted after the big hit.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media, and control means for controlling the payout device to pay out a predetermined amount of game media based on establishment of a predetermined payout condition. (Game control device 100, payout control device 200), it is possible to accurately grasp the number of payout game media when many payout conditions are satisfied in a short time such as a big hit on the external device side. I am doing so.

[Main prize ball remaining number update processing]
Details of the main winning ball remaining number update process (step S203) in the above-described payout command transmission process will be described. In this main award ball remaining number update process, every time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number, planned game medium payout number) generated by winning a prize at the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10), it is output to an external device. Set the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the external device receives a prize ball signal every time the number of prize balls actually paid out (the number of game medium payouts) from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). An illegal payout can be monitored by comparing these two signals.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the main winning ball remaining number update process, first, the value of the remaining winning ball area and the number of payouts are added (step S211). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not reach a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored. In this process, the value of the remaining prize ball area is stored. The value of a positive logic payout command is added as the number of payouts of newly generated prize balls. Then, the added value is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S212).

  That is, the game control apparatus 100 serves as a storage means because the remaining number of prize balls in the RAM 111C forms a game medium storage area for storing the number of game game payouts that have not been output to the outside. Further, the game control device 100 serves as an adding means for adding the scheduled game medium payout number corresponding to the established payout condition to the game medium storage area based on the establishment of the payout condition.

  Thereafter, 10 which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value of the remaining prize ball area (step S213), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S214). When the subtraction result is not equal to or greater than 0 (step S214; N), the main winning ball remaining number update process is terminated. If the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S214; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S215), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S215). S216), the process returns to step S213.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a transmission means for transmitting the predetermined number of scheduled game medium payouts to the outside based on the predetermined number of game medium payouts stored in the game medium storage area reaching a predetermined number. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a subtracting means for subtracting a predetermined number of scheduled game medium payout numbers transmitted from the transmitting means from the game medium storage area. In the present embodiment, a single main prize ball signal is transmitted in correspondence with a predetermined number (10) of scheduled game medium payout numbers. In this main prize ball remaining number update process, the main prize ball signal is set up and transmitted in the main prize ball signal editing process (see FIG. 86) in the external information editing process described later.

  By outputting the main winning ball signal in this way, it is possible to output information to the outside when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, so even if many payout conditions such as a big hit are satisfied in a short time, during the big hit period The number of payout game media can be transmitted to an external device such as a hall computer, and the number of payout game media can be accurately grasped when a lot of payout conditions such as big hits are satisfied in a short time on the external device side. it can. Also, as soon as the payout condition is satisfied, data relating to the number of game media is not output to the outside, but is temporarily stored in the game media storage area of the storage means and then output, so that the number of winning balls that can be handled easily on the external device side Can output information.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 16 shows the random number update process 1 (step S105) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the hit random numbers, jackpot symbol random number 1, and jackpot symbol random number 2 that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S221).

  If the normal hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S221; N), it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S224). In addition, when the normal hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S221; Y), the hit random number initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S222), and the next hit random number of the loaded normal number is next time. The initial value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S223). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S224).

  If the jackpot symbol random number 1 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S224; N), it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S227). If the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S224; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value (step S225), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 1 is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S226). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S227).

  When the big hit symbol random number 2 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S227; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. When the big hit symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S227; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value (step S228), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number 2 is set. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S229), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 17 shows the random number update process 2 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232). Then, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as an R register) used for refreshing a DRAM provided in a Z80 microcomputer used as a gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. The value of the register to which is set is loaded (step S234). By using the value of the R register, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired, and the value of the R register is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value is different in the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the R register. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated. When the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower byte of the R register is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated (random number counter) is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the R register with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as the addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) The mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the masked value is set, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step S236). S238), the process proceeds to step S239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). The process proceeds to step S242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) as the lower 1 byte of the random value. ) Is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S242). S243). If the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

  Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S246). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Accordingly, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the random number of the variation pattern for

[Prize mouth switch / error monitoring process]
FIG. 18 shows a winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). In this winning opening switch / error monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, a detection signal from a count switch) corresponding to one lower count switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38). (The data indicating the number of the input port, the bit position in the port of the signal, etc. is stored) is prepared (step S301). Next, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower count switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (the first special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and normal. A fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S304) for detecting a prize is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the upper count switch 39a in the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S305), and an illegal winning is monitored and a normal winning is detected. The fraud & winning prize monitoring process (step S306) is executed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (start opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step S307), and the illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning. (Step S308) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for a winning opening switch (in this case, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing (step S309), and the number of winnings for which the winning number is updated. Counter update processing (step S310) is performed.

  Next, an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time is updated (step S311). Thereafter, according to the value of the error scan counter, any one of the abnormality detection signal 1 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch, the chute ball switch signal from the dispensing control device 200, the overflow switch signal, and the dispensing abnormality status signal The gaming machine error monitoring table 1 for setting the error monitoring based on the target is prepared (step S312). Then, an error check process (step S313) for determining whether an error has occurred is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the error scan counter is 3 (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is 3 (step S314; Y), the winning opening switch / error monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no error monitoring target in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is not 3 (step S314; N), the glass frame open detection switch 63, the front frame open detection switch 64, the disconnection of the connector of the switch, etc. are generated according to the value of the error scan counter. A gaming machine error monitoring table 2 for setting the monitoring of errors based on any of the output abnormality detection signals 2 is prepared (step S315). Then, an error check process (step S316) for determining whether an error has occurred is performed, and the winning opening switch / error monitoring process is terminated.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 19 shows the fraud & winning monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306, S308) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process. This fraud & winning monitoring process is performed on each of the two lower count switches 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the start port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. This is a process performed on the machine. For the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39) and Fuden (ordinary variable prize-winning device 37), it is easy to cheat by opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the prize ball. In addition to detection of fraud, fraud monitoring.

  In this fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the error monitoring target prize opening switch is the lower count switch 38a. In the case of the upper count switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Further, when the winning port switch to be monitored for error is the start port 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is being executed based on the normal hit.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of illegal winnings after the addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not (5) has been exceeded (step S325).

  The number of judgments is five, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught by the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent the player from judging that the signal is fraudulent when the prize is received or when noise is added to the signal, and is not simply judged as an error although it is not illegal.

  If the determined number is not exceeded (step S325; N), a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330). If the number of determinations is exceeded (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step S326), and the initial value is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step S327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning monitoring table of the target winning mouth switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting a winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step S333). If the notification timer update is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is allowed to be updated (step S333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is allowed when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the one lower count switch 38a, and is not allowed when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the other lower count switch 38a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the first special variation winning device 38 and time-up in half of a specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . Note that the update of the notification timer is always permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the upper count switch 39a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335). If the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S336), and the fraudulent winning cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Preparation is made (step S337). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( In step S339, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S340). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step S340).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag and the value of the target illegal flag area do not match (step S340; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S341), and command setting processing is performed ( Step S342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 20 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S310 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change). Determination is made (step S352).

  If there is no input (step S352: N), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S357). If there is an input (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area is loaded (step S353), the loaded value is updated by 1 (step S354), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs (step S352). S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area (step S356), and it is determined whether all switches have been monitored (step S357). If an overflow has occurred (step S355; Y), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S357).

  When monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step S357; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). If all the switches have been monitored (step S357; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. With the above processing, a winning ball corresponding to the winning is set.

[Command setting processing]
FIG. 21 shows the command setting process (step S342) in the above-described fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this command setting process, first, command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S361), the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S362), and it is determined whether the command is being transmitted. (Step S363).

  If a command is being transmitted (step S363; Y), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S366). If the command is not being transmitted (step S363; N), the transmission circuit is initialized because the circuit may be abnormal (step S364), and the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer ( After step S365), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S366).

  Then, the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S367), and it is determined whether a command is being transmitted (step S368). If the command is being transmitted (step S368; Y), the command setting process is terminated. If the command is not being transmitted (step S368; N), the circuit may be abnormal, so the transmission circuit is initialized (step S369), and the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer. (Step S370), the command setting process is terminated.

  Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. Note that the command may be transmitted to the payout control apparatus 200 by serial communication.

[Error check processing]
FIG. 22 shows the error check process (steps S313 and S316) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process. In this error check process, first, an error monitoring table corresponding to an error scan counter is acquired (step S381), and it is determined whether a switch (including a signal) to be monitored is on, that is, a state indicating an error. Determination is made (step S382).

  If the switch is not on (step S382: N), an error release flag is prepared as an error flag (step S383), and a target error notification end command is prepared (step S384). Thereafter, the target error cancellation monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S385), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the current switch state (step S389).

  On the other hand, if the switch is on (step S382: Y), an error flag is prepared as an error flag (step S386), and a target error notification command is prepared (step S387). Thereafter, the target error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S388), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the current switch state (step S389).

  If the value of the target switch control area matches the current switch state (step S389; Y), that is, if the switch state has not changed, the target error monitoring timer is updated by one (step S392). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S393). If the value of the target switch control area does not match the current switch state (step S389; N), that is, if the switch state changes, the current switch state is saved in the target switch control area ( In step S390), the target error monitoring timer is cleared (step S391), the target error monitoring timer is updated by one (step S392), and the value of the target error monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value. Is determined (step S393).

  If the value of the target error monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S393; N), the error check process is terminated. When the value of the target error monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S393: Y), the error monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S394). The error flag is compared with the value in the target error flag area (step S395).

  If the prepared error flag matches the value of the target error flag area (step S395; Y), the error check process is terminated. If the set error flag does not match the value of the target error flag area (step S395; N), the prepared error flag is saved in the target error flag area (step S396), and command setting processing is performed. (Step S397), the error check process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is obtained. Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. The details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) will be described later.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the lower count switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 or the upper count switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Perform the process.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. And it is determined whether the value of a special figure game process timer is 0 (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is 0 (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the special figure game process number referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step A6). Then, the return address after the branch process ends is saved in the stack area (step A7), and the game branch process (step A8) is performed according to the game process number.

  If the game process number is “0” in step A8, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure fluctuation processing are performed. A special figure routine process (step A9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. In step A8, when the game process number is “1”, a special figure changing process (step for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc.) A10) is performed.

  In step A8, if the game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, fanfare command setting according to the type of the big hit or a big winning opening opening pattern for each big hit A special chart display process (step A11) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the setting, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process, and the like.

  If the game process number is “3” in step A8, the fanfare / setting for setting the opening time of the big prize opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big prize opening, etc. Processing during the interval (step A12) is performed. If the game process number is “4” in step A8, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, or a big prize winning ball remaining ball process A special winning opening opening process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.

  If the game process number is “5” in step A8, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening and the big hit end process are performed. The prize winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) for setting information necessary for the game is performed. If the game process number is “6” in step A8, a big hit end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process (step A9) is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A16), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A17) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A18), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A19) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not 0 in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A16 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, after preparing a table for setting the information on hold by the first start port (start winning prize port 36) (step A111), the special drawing start port switch common process (Step A112) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step A112 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step A116.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric winning component (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball can be won. If it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A115, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A114).

  In determining whether the electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A114 that there is no fraud in ordinary power transmission (step A114; N), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A115), The starting port switch common process (step A116) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, if it is determined in step A114 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step A114; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps A112 and A116) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the special view start port switch common process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A201). If there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step A201; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A201; Y), it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202; Y), after saving the start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored (step A203), the target random number latch register is monitored. The extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared (step A204).

  Subsequently, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port signal which is the number of times information related to the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The output count is loaded (step A205), the loaded value is updated by 1 (step A206), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A207). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A207; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A208), and the process proceeds to step A209. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A207; Y), the process proceeds to step A209.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A209). If the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit (step A209; Y), the special figure hold number to be updated (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) is updated by 1 (step A212), and is monitored. The decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A213), and the command setting process (step A214) is performed.

  Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of special figure hold corresponding to the monitoring start switch to be monitored is calculated (step A215), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A216). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A217), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A218). Further, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step A219). Then, a special figure hold information determination process (step A220) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and stores the start of the variable display game in a predetermined manner. A start winning storage means for storing the number at the upper limit is provided. The start winning storage means (game control apparatus 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. And various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting storage up to a predetermined number.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A209 that the number of special figure hold is not less than the upper limit (step A209; N), a special figure hold number command (pending overflow command) is prepared (step A210) and command setting processing (step A211) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A220) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  As shown in FIG. 26, first, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the pre-reading effect are satisfied (step A231), and if not satisfied (step A231; N), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. . Moreover, when satisfy | filling (step A231; Y), the process regarding the following prefetch effect is performed.

  Here, the case where the condition for executing the pre-reading effect is satisfied is a case where the input of the start port switch according to step A201 of the special-purpose start port switch common process is the input of the start port 2 switch 37a. In addition, when the input of the start port switch according to step A201 of the special-purpose start port switch common processing is the input of the start port 1 switch 36a, when the open extension function of the normal variable winning device 37 is not in operation, This is a case where it is not in a state, and a case where it is not in a big hit (special game state).

  In the process related to the prefetch effect performed when the conditions for executing the prefetch effect are satisfied (step A231; Y), first, whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not is a big hit. A big hit determination process (step A232) is performed to determine whether or not. If the determination result is a big hit (step A233; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A234), the big hit symbol random number is checked and the corresponding big hit stop symbol is set. A pattern is acquired (step A235), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the prefetch stop symbol pattern area (step A237). On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A233; N), a stoppage stop symbol pattern is set (step A236), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the prefetch stop symbol pattern region (step A237).

  Thereafter, a pre-read symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A238), and command setting processing is performed (step A239). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A240) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed to prepare a latter half fluctuation pattern setting information table corresponding to the target starter switch (step A240). A241), a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A242).

  Then, a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A243), and command setting processing is performed ( Step A244), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A240 and the variation pattern setting process in step A242 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the main display device 41, for example, by changing the result related information to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. Can be notified.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of start winning when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, is the special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38 or second special variable winning device 39) being open, that is, in a special gaming state? Is determined (step A251). If the big prize opening is not open (step A251; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the big prize opening is open (step A251; Y), 0 is set to the prize counter for counting the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening that is added in the current big prize opening switch monitoring process. (Step A252), it is determined whether the lower prize winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether it is in a special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (Step A253).

  When the lower prize winning opening is being opened (step A253; Y), it is determined whether or not the big winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed at the end of one round (step A254). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A254; Y), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A254; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower winning port switch 1 (one lower count switch 38a) (step A255).

  If there is no input to the lower major prize opening switch 1 (step A255; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (step A259). If there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 1 (step A255; Y), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A256), and a lower major prize opening count command is prepared (step A257). Then, a command setting process (step A258) is performed to determine whether or not there is an input to the lower large prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (step A259).

  If there is no input to the lower large prize opening switch 2 (step A259; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268). If there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 2 (step A259; Y), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A260), and a lower major prize opening count command is prepared (step A261). Then, command setting processing (step A262) is performed, and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268).

  On the other hand, when the lower major prize opening is not open (step A253; N), that is, the upper major prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is being opened (special game that opens the second special variable prize winning device 39). If it is in the state), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch (upper count switch 39a) (step A263). If there is no input to the top prize winning opening switch (step A263; N), the big winning prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the top prize winning opening switch (step A263; Y), it is determined whether the big winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed (step A264).

  When it is not in the process of remaining the winning prize remaining ball (step A264; N), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A265), and an upper winning prize count command is prepared (step A266). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A264; Y), an upper winning ticket count command is prepared (step A266). Thereafter, command setting processing (step A267) is performed to determine whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268). In the case of the top prize winning opening, the top prize winning count command is transmitted even during the processing of the remaining prize winning ball in order to produce an effect by winning.

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268), when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step A268; N), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of big winning mouth counts (step A269), and the number of big winning mouth counts is the upper limit (winning in one round). It is determined whether or not the number of possible game balls has been exceeded (step A270).

  When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A270; N), the big winning prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A270; Y), the big winning mouth count is kept at the upper limit (step A271), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step). A272). Then, the pointer is loaded from the big hit control pointer upper limit value area (step A273), the loaded pointer is saved in the big hit midpoint control pointer area (step A274), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process (steps A17 and A19) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbols. As shown in FIG. 28, in the symbol fluctuation control process, first, the special figure fluctuation control flag relating to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is changing among the first special figure and the second special figure. Is checked (step A281).

  If the special figure changing flag is changing (step A282; Y), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled is acquired (step S282). A283), among the first special figure and the second special figure, the flashing control timer according to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by -1 (step A284), and the value of the timer is 0. That is, it is determined whether the time is up (step A285).

  If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step A285; N), display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step A288). If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step A285; Y), the blinking control timer initial value is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step A286), and the first and second special figures are saved. Among them, the variable symbol number related to the control target special figure (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (step A287), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A288). ). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A291), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (step A282; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled is acquired (step A289). . Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step A290), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A291), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled (for example, the special figure 1 display 51) among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. It becomes.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is 0 (step A306). If it is determined that the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step A306; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A311). If the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (step A311; N) saves the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A313), a command setting process (step A314) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A311, (step A311; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area ( Step A322), the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (Step A323). Then, a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A325). The normal process transition setting process 1 ends.

  Returning to FIG. 29, if the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 in step A301 (step A301; N), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number after -1 update is prepared ( Step A302) and command setting processing (step A303) are performed. Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is performed, the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step A305) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated. In step A306, if the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step A306; N), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number after the -1 update is prepared (step A307). Then, command setting processing (step A308) is performed. Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A309) is performed, the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step A310) of special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. That is, it is configured to execute the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory based on the fact that the predetermined condition that the start memory exists and the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed is established instead of the special gaming state. Yes.

  At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (steps A307 and A302), the subtraction number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure variation display game, and the current special figure 1 hold number or A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number minus -1 from the special figure 2 hold number is prepared. The process of actually updating the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number by -1 is the fluctuation start information setting process (FIG. 39) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A309) or the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Step A441).

  In this way, the special figure 2 hold count is checked before the special figure 1 hold count check, and if the special figure 2 hold count is not 0, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is executed. Will be. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start winning memory means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is changed based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the display game is provided.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A309) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 31, first, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set the shift information and the jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 32 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A341). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A342). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A343) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A343) is a big hit (step A344; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A341 (step A345). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A343) is not a big hit (step A344; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended while saving the deviation information to the big hit flag 1.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 33 shows the big hit determination process (step A343) in the big hit flag 1 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A351), and it is determined whether the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A352). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A352; Y), that is, when it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A357), and the big hit determination process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A352; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step A353).

  If it is in a high probability state (step A353; Y), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (step A354), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356). ). If not in the high probability state (step A353; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A355), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356). .

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356; Y), that is, when it is out of place, the determination result is set as out (step A357), and the big hit determination process ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356; N), that is, if the big hit is, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A358), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A361). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A361; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A362). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A364). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the main display device 41. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A367). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Further, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A368), and the big prize opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the big prize opening is released. Save in the information area (step A369). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A372).

  On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step A361; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A370), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A370). A371), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A372). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A373), and command setting processing (step A374) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A375), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A376). The stop symbol setting process in FIG.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (step A334) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in short time (short time state) (step A381). If it is not in the special drawing time (step A381; N), the normal variation pattern selection group information table is set (step A382). If the special drawing time is short (step A381; Y), the time variation variable pattern selection group information table is set (step A383).

  Then, the number of special figure hold corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag is loaded (step A384), the fluctuation pattern selection group information corresponding to the special figure hold number is acquired and saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A385). . Thereby, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2) for starting the fluctuation, the number-of-holds information that is information on the number of start memories for the type of special figure, The variable distribution information 1 obtained from the game state information including information on whether or not the state is saved is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is used to select a fluctuation group later. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

  Next, a distribution base pointer table is set (step A386), and a distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A387). Further, the effect mode number is added to the acquired pointer (step A388), the value after the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step A389), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the variable distribution information 2 obtained from the stop symbol pattern information and the production mode information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is used to select a fluctuation group later. In addition, as for the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the short-time state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, five modes of effect modes 0 to 4 are prepared as effect modes. Production modes 0 (production mode number is 0) and production modes 1 (production mode number is 1) are provided as production modes that can be selected when the normal probability state and the time-short state are not set. In addition, the production mode 2 (the production mode number is 2) is a production mode that can be selected when the normal probability state or the high probability state but the state is not clearly notified (so-called latent state) and the time is short. It is prepared. In addition, a production mode 3 (production mode number is 3) and a production mode 4 (production mode number is 4) are provided as production modes that can be selected in a high-probability state and a short-time state.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting process (step A336) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process will be described. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A391), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A392). ). Then, it is determined whether the production mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (step A393). If the production mode number is not less than 2 (step A393; N), it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a slippage stop symbol pattern (step A394). If the stop symbol pattern is not a slippage stop symbol pattern (step A394; N). ) Loads the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepares it (step A397).

  On the other hand, when the production mode number is less than 2 (step A393; Y), or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern (step A394; Y), the variable distribution information 1 from the table prepared in step A392. The address of the table corresponding to is acquired (step A395). Next, the acquired address is prepared as the address of the latter-half variation group (step A396), and the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A397).

  When the production mode number is less than 2 or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern, the address is obtained by taking into account the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the hold number information that is information related to the start memory number. Thus, the variation pattern selection mode is made different depending on the number of starting memories.

  Thereafter, 2-byte distribution processing (step A398) is performed, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A399), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding number 1) The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared (Step A400). Then, a sorting process (step A401) is performed, and the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A402). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step A403), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and 2 (including the determined second half variation number) (step A404). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A405), and a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A406). ). Thereafter, a sorting process (step A407) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step A408), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set.

  In this way, in the setting of the variation pattern that prescribes the execution mode and variation time of the special figure variation display game, the variation distribution information 2 considering the current rendering mode is used, and the variation pattern corresponding to the rendering mode is changed. Setting is possible. That is, the game control device 100 sets the execution mode of the variable display game including at least the variable display game change time according to the effect mode set by the effect mode control means (game control device 100, see FIG. 49). It constitutes execution mode setting means.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 37 shows a 2-byte sorting process (step A398) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the leading data of the latter half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A411). ). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

  If the first data in the latter-half variation group table is a code with no sorting (step A412; Y), update to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step A417) and end the 2-byte sorting process. To do. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter-half variation group table is not a code without distribution (step A412; N), the first distribution value specified in the latter-half variation group table is acquired (step A413).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A413 from the random value loaded in Step A397 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (Step A414). It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A415). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A415; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A416), the process proceeds to step A413 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired in step A413, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random value as the new random value in step A415, and a new random value is further subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step A414). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A415).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A415 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A415; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step A415 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A415; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A417), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 38 shows the distribution process (steps A401 and A407) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared latter half variation selection table (selection table) and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). (Step A421). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without sorting (step A422; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step A427), and the sorting is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A422; N), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step A423).

  Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A423 from the random number value (the value of the variation pattern random number 2 or the variation pattern random number 3) loaded in step A400 or A406, a new random value is calculated ( In step A424), it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A425; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A426), the process proceeds to step A423, and the subsequent steps Process.

  That is, in step A423, after the distribution value specified next in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number value as a new random number value in step A425. Further, a new random value is calculated (step A424). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A425 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in step A425 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A427), and the distribution process ends. To do.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the variation start information setting process (step A337) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A431). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A432), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A433). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A434), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A435).

  Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A436), and the addition value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A437). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A438), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A439), and command setting processing is performed (step A440). . That is, the variation command includes at least information about the variation time, and forms variation time information for specifying the variation time in the variation display game. Next, the special symbol hold number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by −1 (step A441), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step A442), and the random number storage region is shifted. (Step A443), and the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (Step A444).

  Thereafter, as a process related to the extension of the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game, first, the stop extension information area is cleared (step A445). When the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (step A446; Y), the effect mode number is 2 (step A447; Y), and the remaining number of rotations (game number) in the effect mode is 1. In (Step A448; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (Step A449).

  If the special figure is not in high probability (step A449; N), the stop extension information 1 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A450), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step A452). A command setting process (step A453) is performed, and the variation start information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 1 (first extension stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time). If the special figure high probability is present (step A449; Y), the stop extension information 2 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A451), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step S451). A452), a command setting process (step A453) is performed, and the change start information setting process is terminated. As a result, the stop time is set to the special figure extended display time 2 (second extended stop time) that is longer than the normal special figure display time.

  When the production mode number is 2, there is a production mode 2 that can be selected when the state is a normal probability state or a high probability state, but this is not clearly notified (so-called latent state), and the time is short. This is the case. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the production mode 2 is set when the normal probability state and the short time state are set after the special gaming state ends. In this case, the short-time state is continued until 70 special figure fluctuation display games are executed, and the production mode 2 is also continued in accordance with this until 70 special figure fluctuation display games are executed. Has been. Also, in some cases where the high probability state and the short time state are set after the special gaming state is ended, there is a case where the latent state in which the high probability state is not clearly notified may be set. In this case, the production mode 2 is set. This latent state is continued until the 70th special figure fluctuation display game is executed, and accordingly, the rendering mode 2 is also continued until the 70th special figure fluctuation display game is executed. Has been.

  That is, until the special figure variation display game is executed 70 times in the production mode 2, it is not clearly notified whether the state is the high probability state or the normal probability state. And in the production mode 2 and the production remaining rotation speed is 1, that is, in the 70th special figure fluctuation display game, the first extended stop time is set in the normal probability state, and in the high probability state. For example, the second extended stop time is set. Probability status will be notified by performing an effect during this extended stop time. When the production mode 2 is set, the production mode 3 is set as the next mode transition information in the high probability state, and the production mode 0 is set as the next mode transition information in the normal probability state. The production mode shifts according to this information.

  On the other hand, when the stop symbol pattern is not an outlier stop symbol pattern (step A446; N), when the effect mode number is not 2 (step A447; N), or when the remaining number of rotations (game number) in effect mode 2 is not 1. (Step A448; N) ends the change start information setting process. In this case, the stop time extension is not set and the normal stop time is set. In this way, the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the specific rotation speed, and the state of the production mode. It has come to be. Thereby, for example, it is possible to set an effect that is continuous between the variation time and the stop time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Through the above processing, the variable display start information that is information related to the start of the special figure variable display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start winning storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Then, the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are set, and the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is started. That is, based on the variable display start information, a variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) is executed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a game control means for instructing the start of execution of a variable display game that displays a result mode after a plurality of symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the main display device 41.

  The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information related to the stop symbol (result mode), and a special figure fluctuation. There are a variation command including information regarding a variation pattern (including variation time) of the display game, and a stop information command including information regarding extension of the stop time, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced. In addition, information with high priority is transmitted first, and even if a command is dropped during the process, damage can be minimized. As for the stop time, a fixed stop time is set in advance, and stop extension information is transmitted only when the stop time is extended. As a result, it is not necessary to send information on the stop time every time, and the control burden can be reduced.

  From the above, the game control means (game control device 100) stores the start memory of the variable display game based on the predetermined upper limit number based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). Start winning storage means (game control device 100) for storing up to, and configured to execute a variable display game based on the start storage based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, display control means (effect control device) as the variable display start information 300) is transmitted in the order of information relating to the number of start memories after being subtracted with the start of the variable display game, information relating to the result mode of the variable display game, and information relating to the variable time of the variable display game. It will be like that.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  As shown in FIG. 40, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A461), and the second special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A462) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A463) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information which is a table in which information is set for performing various information setting processing (step A464, see FIG. 35) and referring to various information regarding the fluctuation pattern setting of the second special figure fluctuation display game. A table is prepared (step A465). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (see step A466, FIG. 36) for setting a variation pattern for the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information for the second special figure variation display game. (See Step A467, FIG. 39), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 41 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A462) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this process, the same process as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 32 is performed for the second start-up memory. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A471). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A472). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A473, see FIG. 33) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A473) is a big hit (step A474; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A471 (step A475). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A473) is not a big hit (step A474; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A463) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 34 is performed on the second start-up memory. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A481). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A481; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A482). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A483), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A484). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A485), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A486). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the main display device 41. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A487). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Furthermore, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A488), and the big winning opening release information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and the big winning opening is released. Save in the information area (step A489). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A492).

  On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step A481; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number region (step A490), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region (step A490). A491), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A492). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A493), and command setting processing (step A494) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A495), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A496). The stop symbol setting process in FIG.

  In other words, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize opening (start prize winning hole 36), and the second start prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning). Based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
FIG. 43 shows the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special-figure normal process (see FIG. 29). In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A501), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A502).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A503), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A504). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A505), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. For example, 200 ms) is set (step A506), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
FIG. 44 shows the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the special-figure normal process (see FIG. 29). In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A512).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 200 ms) is set (step A516), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the special figure changing process, it is first determined whether or not there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (step A601). If there is no stop extension information (step A601; N), the normal special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A602), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step A606). To complete the special figure display process.

  If there is stop extension information (step A601; Y), it is determined whether the stop extension information is 1 (step A603). If it is the stop extension information 1 (step A603; Y), the special figure extension display time 1 (for example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A604), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step S604) A606) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not stop extension information 1 (step A603; N), that is, when it is stop extension information 2, special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A605), The special figure display process transition setting process (step A606) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (step A606) in the special figure changing process described above. In this special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number “2” related to the special figure display process is set (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A612).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (steps A613, A614), and the symbol related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output is determined in the external information terminal. A control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the count signal control timer area (step A615). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A616). ) As the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A617), the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step A11) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the special figure displaying process, first, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A621), and the RWM big hit flag 2 is loaded. A process of clearing the area (step A622) is performed. Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A623). If it is determined that the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A623; Y), the RWM big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step A628), and the second special A test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A629), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A630).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A623 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A623; N) as a result of the check, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded. (Step A624), the RWM jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (Step A625). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A626). If it is determined that the big hit flag is a big hit (step A626; Y), the big hit (first figure big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is determined. A test signal related to the start is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A627), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A630) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A630), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A631). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A632).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step A633), and a command setting process (step A634) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the winning result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game as a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A635), and a command setting process ( Step A636) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A637), and the command setting process (step A638). )I do.

  Next, the winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A639). Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening information is saved in the special game process timer area (step A640). Then, the winning prize mouth illegal winning number area of the winning prize opening corresponding to the winning prize opening opening information (the first special variable winning prize apparatus 38 or the second special variable winning prize apparatus 39) is cleared (step A641), and the special winning opening is opened. A fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to the information (step A642).

  Next, the special figure game mode flag is loaded (step A643), and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A644). Thereby, the information on the production mode when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later. Thereafter, fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A645) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit at step A626 in FIG. 47 (step A626; N), the special mode variation display for setting the short time state is performed by performing the production mode information check process (step A646) regarding the setting of the production mode. Time shortening fluctuation frequency update processing (step A647) for managing the number of game executions is performed. Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A648, see FIG. 30) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A645) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A651) and processed in the special figure game process number area. The number is saved (step A652).

  Next, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (special gaming state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A653), and a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A654). . Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A655), and the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A656). Save the low probability of ordinary figure & no ordinary power support flag in the flag area (step A657).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A658), and the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 59) related to the display of the high probability state ( In step A659), the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A660). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A661), and a special figure variation display that can be executed in a short time state. The time reduction variation frequency area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A662). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and a normal probability state and a normal operation state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the number of effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A663), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A664). Then, the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A665), the effect mode 1 command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A666), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. . As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

  Next, details of the effect mode information check process (step A646) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine that executes a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on a winning of a game ball at a start winning opening, a game control device that comprehensively controls the game, and the game control device Is provided with an effect control device that controls the effect. In such a gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a plurality of production modes having different production contents and the like are changed in order to enhance the interest of the game. In conventional gaming machines, the production mode is managed by the production control device, but the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display game (fluctuation time, presence / absence of reach, etc.) is determined by the game control device and must be followed. However, even if the effect mode is changed, the display content is only changed.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a variable display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a variable manner is executed based on the winning of a game ball in a winning opening, and the game is performed when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result mode. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a predetermined game value to a player, the game control device 100 manages the production mode for the purpose of expanding the range of production and enhancing the interest of the game.

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, five modes of effect modes 0 to 4 are prepared as effect modes, and these transitions are managed by the game control device 100. When setting each production mode, the remaining number of production rotations, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that maintains the production mode, and next mode transition information, which is information on the production mode to be transferred next, are set. The production mode is shifted accordingly. In addition, the production mode may be set when the special game state ends.

  In the production mode 0 (production mode number is 0) and production mode 1 (production mode number is 1) that can be selected in the normal probability state and not the short-time state, the number of remaining production rotations is a predetermined number of times (15, 30, 60, etc.). Is set, and the effect mode 1 or the effect mode 0 is set so as to alternately shift to the effect mode of each other as the next mode transition information.

  In addition, with the end of the special gaming state as an opportunity for setting, the production mode 2 (which is set when the state is the normal probability state or the high probability state, but this is not clearly notified (so-called latent state), and the state is the short time state ( In the effect mode number 2), 70 is set as the effect remaining rotation speed, and the effect mode 1 is set in the normal probability state and the effect mode 3 is set in the high probability state as the next mode transition information.

  In addition, when the end of the special game state is set as an opportunity to set and clearly notify that the state is a high probability state, the production mode 3 (production mode number is 3) or the production mode 4 (production mode number is 4). Is set. Which production mode is set is determined by the type of special result mode, the result of prior determination, or the like. The effect mode 3 is an effect mode that is continued until the next special result mode is derived, the effect remaining rotational speed is not set because it is indefinite, and the next mode transition information is not updated because the effect mode to be transferred next is also undefined. Is set. In effect mode 4, effect remaining speed is set to 4, and effect mode 3 is set as next mode transition information.

  In the following effect mode information check process, the transition of the effect mode according to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the transition of the effect mode triggered by the special game state is a jackpot end process (FIG. 65). Controlled.

[Direction mode information check processing]
As shown in FIG. 49, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A671). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A671; Y), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the effect mode 3 that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. Yes, this production mode 3 constitutes a specific production mode that can be set at least during the high probability state. In this case, the remaining production rotation speed that is the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that maintains the production mode 3 is not set.

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A671; N), the effect remaining rotational speed, which is the number of times that the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A672). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect has become 0 (step A673). When the remaining effect rotation speed becomes 0 (step A673; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A674), and the next mode transition is made. The address of the table corresponding to the information is acquired (step A675).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A676), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed area (step S676). A677), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A678). Here, when the effect mode to be transferred is the above-mentioned specific effect mode (effect mode 3), the effect remaining rotation speed is not set, and the next mode shift information is set with a no-update code. . Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A679), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A680), command setting processing (step A681) is performed, and effect mode information check processing is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, when the remaining effect rotation speed is not 0 (step A673; N), that is, when the current effect mode continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (for example, 8 times). It is determined whether there is any (step A682). If the remaining effect rotation speed is not the specified rotation speed (step A682; N), the effect mode information check process ends. When the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (step A682; Y), an effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A683), command setting processing (step A684) is performed, and effect mode information check processing is performed. finish. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In other words, the game control device 100 serves as an effect mode control means for selecting and setting any effect mode from a plurality of effect modes with different effect execution modes. Further, the game control device 100 serves as an effect mode continuation number setting means for setting the number of executions of the variable display game for maintaining the set effect mode. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a management unit that manages the remaining number of executions of the variable display game that maintains the effect mode.

  According to the above processing, the effect mode can be changed by the game control device 100 that determines the execution mode of the special figure variation display game, so that the variation time can be changed depending on each effect mode. It is possible to expand the range of production and enhance the interest of the game. In addition, for example, it is possible to reliably generate a reach in a special figure fluctuation display game in which it is desired to generate a reach, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, by allowing the game control device 100 to manage the remaining number of executions of the special figure variation display game that maintains the set production mode, it is possible to produce an effect such as varying the variation time according to the remaining number of times. Can expand the range of games and enhance the fun of the game. Furthermore, even if the number of remaining executions of the special figure variation display game in a specific production mode is indefinite, such as a specific production mode until the next special result occurs, the range of production can be expanded. The fun of gaming can be enhanced.

  Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball to the winning opening (start winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37), the variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed, and the result of the variable display game is special. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a predetermined gaming value to a player when a result mode is achieved, the game control device 100 that controls the game, and the content of the effect based on the control data from the game control device 100 An effect control device 300 for controlling, and the game control device 100 selects and sets any effect mode from a plurality of effect modes having different execution modes of the effect, and a game mode control means (game control device 100). The execution mode of setting the execution mode of the variable display game including at least the variable time of the variable display game according to the display mode set by the display mode control means So that the includes a constant unit (game controller 100), the. Here, the execution mode of the variation display game includes at least the variation time, and may include the presence / absence of reach, the length of the stop time, and the like.

  The effect mode control means (game control device 100) includes effect mode continuation number setting means (game control device 100) for setting the number of executions of the variable display game for maintaining the set effect mode, and variation for maintaining the effect mode. Management means (game control device 100) for managing the remaining number of executions of the display game is provided.

  In addition, the game control device 100 has a probability setting means (game control device 100) that can set a high probability state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes a special result mode is higher than the normal probability state after the special game state is ended. The probability setting means maintains the high probability state until the next special result mode is derived when the high probability state is set, and the effect mode control means (game control device 100) is at least in the high probability state. When the specific production mode is set based on the fact that the production mode continuation number setting means (game control device 100) is in a high probability state, the specific production mode is set. The number of executions of the variable display game to be maintained is not set.

[Time shortening fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time shortening variation number update process (step A647) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the time shortening fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not a special figure high probability (high probability state) is being reached (step A691). When the special figure high probability is in progress (step A691; Y), the time-reduced variation number of times update processing is terminated. If it is not in the special figure high probability (step A691; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is short (time short state) (step A692).

  If it is not during the special drawing time reduction (step A692; N), the time-reduced variation number of times update processing is terminated. If the special figure time is short (step A692; Y), the time shortening variation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be in the short time state is updated by -1 (step A693), and the time shortening variation number is updated. Is determined to be 0 (step A694). If the time shortening variation number is not 0 (step A694; N), that is, if the time-short state continues in the next special figure variation display game, the time shortening variation number updating process is terminated. If the time shortening variation count is 0 (step A694; Y), that is, if the time-short state ends in this special figure variation display game, a probability information command (time-short end) is prepared (step A695), Command setting processing (step A696) is performed. After that, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) is performed (step A697), and the time shortening variation number update process is ended.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 2 (at the end of short time)]
FIG. 51 shows special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) (step A697) in the above-described time-reduced variation frequency update process. In this special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction), first, a signal related to the end of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A701), and a signal related to the end of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step A702).

  Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A703), and the ordinary low probability & no power support flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A704). Further, a special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A705), and a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A706). The normal process transition setting process 2 (at the time saving end) is terminated.

  Here, the types of special results and the opening / closing patterns of the special prize opening (special variable prize device) in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described. There are four types of special results: 2R variation, 11R variation, 11R normal and 16R variation. The 2R probability variation, 11R probability variation and 16R probability variation are 2, 11, 16 rounds in the special gaming state, respectively, and the probability state is set to the high probability state until the next special result is derived after the special gaming state ends. This is a special result that is considered to be a short time. In addition, 11R normally has 11 rounds in the special gaming state, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the normal probability state, and a special figure variation display game of a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times). It is a special result that is in a short time until execution.

  In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment includes a lower grand prize opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) and an upper large prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), each having a plurality of opening / closing patterns. . One opening / closing pattern is selected from the plurality of opening / closing patterns in accordance with the type of special result. In the following opening and closing patterns, the value shown as the opening time of the big winning opening indicates the maximum opening time, and when a predetermined number of game balls flow into the winning opening before the maximum opening time elapses in one round Closes the grand prize opening without waiting for the maximum opening time to elapse and the round ends.

  FIG. 52 shows an open / close pattern of the upper university winning opening (second special variable winning device 39). The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 52 (a) is selected when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the short-time state when derived. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, the opening time of 52 ms is set in the first round (1R), and the opening time of 52 ms is set in the next round (2R) after the interval time of 1448 ms is interposed. Then, after the ending time of 22400 ms elapses, the special game state ends.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 52 (b) is selected when the special result is 2R probability variation and the time is short when the special result is derived. The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 has the same opening / closing manner as the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern, but has an ending time of 1400 ms. The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 52 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3, the round in which the opening time of 52 ms is set is 16 rounds with the interval time of 1448 ms, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state is ended.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 52 (d) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, first, in the first round (1R), the opening of 52 ms is performed 16 times with the closing time of 1448 ms similarly to the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3. Up to this point, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3, and the effect on the main display device 41 is the same, making it difficult for the player to recognize which opening / closing pattern it is. Thereafter, a promotion video is displayed on the main display device 41 at the closing time of 6300 ms to notify that it is the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, and the opening of 26168 ms is performed to finish the first round. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 52 (e) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5, in the first round (1R), first, 52 ms is opened, then 26948 ms is opened with a closing time of 5948 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  FIG. 53 shows the opening / closing pattern of the lower grand prize opening (the first special variable winning device 38). The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 53A is selected when the special result is 11R probability change or 11R normal. In the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1, in the first round (1R), first, the opening is performed for 200 ms, and then the opening is performed for 28000 ms with the closing time of 5800 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 10 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 53 (b) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In this lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2, the opening / closing mode is the same as the lower big prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 and 3 until the end of the eleventh round, and the effects on the main display device 41 are the same. It is difficult to recognize whether it is an open / close pattern. After the end of 11 rounds, a round in which an opening time of 200 ms is set with an interval time of 1500 ms is repeated 5 times, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 53 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results which are 16R probability variation. In this lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 3, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower big prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 and 2 until the end of the eleventh round, and the effects on the main display device 41 are the same. It is difficult to recognize whether it is an open / close pattern. Then, after the end of the 11th round, a promotion video is displayed on the main display device 41 at an interval time of 13000 ms to notify that the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 is present. Thereafter, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set is repeated 5 times with an interval time of 2000 ms, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A12) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A751), and the winning prize opening information is the upper winning prize opening (second special variable winning device 39). It is determined whether the open / close pattern is 1 to 3 (step A752).

  When the winning prize opening information is the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step A752; Y), the control pointers (S (start value), E (end) corresponding to the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are set. Value)) is set (step A759), and the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. By setting the start value and the end value of the control pointer, it is possible to set the opening / closing and closing time of the big winning opening in one round based on the big winning opening control table. In the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, since the execution time of one round is short, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state instead of every round. The round command corresponding to the number is not transmitted. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step A752; N), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A753), and command setting processing is performed. (Step A754) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the round to be started is the first round (1R) (step A755). If it is the first round (step A755; Y), the big prize opening information is the lower special prize opening (first special prize) It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 38) is an open / close pattern (step A756). If the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A756; Y), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern is set (step A760), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. If the big prize opening information is not the lower big opening opening / closing pattern (step A756; N), it is determined whether the big winning opening information is the upper big opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757).

  When the big prize opening information is the upper prize opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757; Y), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper prize opening / closing pattern 4 is set. (Step A758), the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG. Further, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757; N), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening / closing pattern 5 is set. (Step A761), the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the started round is not the first round (1R) (step A755; N), it is determined whether the started round is 2-11 rounds (step A762), and the started rounds are 2-11. If it is round (step A762; Y), it is determined whether the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening / closing pattern (step A763). Then, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern (step A763; N), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to 2 to 11 rounds of the lower winning opening / closing pattern are set (step A763; N). A764), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern (step A763; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening / closing pattern are set (step S763). A765), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG.

  If the started round is not 2 to 11 rounds (step A762; N), it is determined whether the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (step A766). Then, when the special prize opening information is the upper prize opening / closing pattern (step A766; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper prize opening / closing pattern are set (step S766). A765), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. If the big prize opening information is not the upper big opening / closing pattern (step A766; N), it is determined whether the big winning opening information is the lower big opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767).

  If the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th round and after of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2 are set (step A768), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is not the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767; N), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th and subsequent rounds of the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 3 are set ( Step A769) and the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG.

  55, the start value (S) of the set control pointer is saved in the big hit middle control pointer area (step A770), and the end value (E) of the set control pointer is saved in the big hit middle control pointer upper limit area. Save (Step A771). Then, solenoid information setting processing (step A772) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the big prize opening information is a lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A773).

  When the big prize opening information is a lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A773; Y), the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is performed (step A774), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated. Further, when the special prize opening information is not the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern (Step A773; N), the process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening is performed (Step A775), and the fanfare / interval processing is ended. One of the open / close patterns shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 is set by the above processing.

[Solenoid information setting process]
FIG. 56 shows the solenoid information setting process (step A772) in the above-described fanfare / interval process. In the solenoid information setting process, first, a big winning opening control address table is set (step A781), and the address of the big winning opening control table corresponding to the big hit control pointer is acquired (step A782). After that, output data is acquired, saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A783), opening / closing time value is acquired and special figure game process timer area is saved (step A784), and the solenoid information setting process is terminated. To do. With this process, opening and closing of the special winning opening and the time are set.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 57 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A774). In the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1, first, the processing number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A792). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the lower prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A793), and the information of the big winning prize count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize is cleared (step A794). . Then, the lower big prize opening controlling flag is saved in the big prize opening discrimination flag area (step A795), and the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 58 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A775). In the special prize opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the special prize opening opening process (step A 801), and the processing number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A802). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the top prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A803), and information in the big winning count area storing the number of winning prizes in the big winning prize is cleared (step A804). . Then, the top winning mouth opening control flag is saved in the big winning mouth distinguishing flag area (step A805), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the big prize opening opening process, first, the big hit control pointer is updated by +1 (step A811), and it is determined whether the value of the control pointer has reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A811). Step A812).

  When the value of the control pointer has not reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A812; N), solenoid information setting processing (step A819, see FIG. 56) is performed. Thereby, the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening according to the updated control pointer is set. Then, a process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening is performed 3 (step A820), and the process for opening a special prize opening is ended. As shown in FIG. 61, in the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 3, the process number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A841), and the processing number is set in the special game process number area. Save (step A842), and finish the process transition setting process 3 during the special winning opening opening.

  Referring back to FIG. 59, when the value of the control pointer reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A812; Y), the big prize opening information is the upper big prize opening short opening pattern (upper big prize opening release pattern 1). -3) is determined (step A813). If the big prize opening information is the upper prize opening short opening pattern (step A813; Y), the big prize opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A818) is performed, and the process for opening the big prize opening is ended. In this case, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state, and no interval command or ending command is transmitted.

  In addition, when the big prize opening information is not the upper prize opening short opening pattern (step A813; N), the current round number in the special game state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM, Are compared to determine whether the current round is the final round (step A814). If it is not the final round (step A814; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A815), command setting processing (step A817) is performed, and the winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting processing ( Step A818) is performed, and the special winning opening opening process is terminated. If it is the final round (step A814; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step A816), and the command setting process (step A817) is performed. Then, a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A818) is performed, and the special winning opening open process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 60 shows the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A818) in the above-described special winning opening open process. In this special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning prize remaining ball processing (step A831), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A831). Step A832). Thereafter, the winning prize remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms), which is the time required for the remaining ball processing, is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A833). Then, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the first special variable prize-winning device 38 or the open / close door 39c of the second special variable prize-winning device 39, off data for turning off the big prize opening solenoid 38b or 39b is provided as a big prize opening solenoid. The data is saved in the output data area (step A834), and the big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the winning ball remaining ball process, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special gaming state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A851).

  If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A851; N), the current round number and the interval time corresponding to the special prize opening information are saved in the special game processing timer area (step A852). ), The fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step A853) is performed, and the winning prize remaining ball process is terminated. The interval time is set to a time corresponding to the current round number and the special winning opening opening information (for example, 68 ms for the upper winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3). The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round to the time that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses, and further from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time until the interval time elapses. For example, in the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, it is 1448 ms.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A851; Y), the game mode flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag saving area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived. (Step A854). Then, the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag and the special winning opening release information is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A855), and the big hit ending process transition setting process (step A856) is performed, and the big winning prize remaining ball The process ends.

  The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses from the end of the final round, and the ending time from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time. This is the period until elapses. For example, when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the short-time state at the time of deriving the special result, that is, when the special result is in the production mode other than the short-time state, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern is selected. If it is 1, the ending time is 21020 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is 22400 ms, including 1380 ms that is spent as the extra winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time, and the ending effect is executed on the main display device 41 and the like in this ending period. Further, when the special result is 2R probability change and the time is short when the special result is derived, that is, when the special mode is the production mode selected in the time short state when the special result is derived, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern is selected. If it is 2, the ending time is 20 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is set to 1400 ms in combination with 1380 ms spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 63 shows the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step A853) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In this fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A861), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A861). A862).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of opening of the lower university winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A863), and the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is opened. A signal relating to the end is saved in the test signal output data area (step A864). Then, the special winning opening determination flag area is cleared (step A865), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 64 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A856) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A871), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A872). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening completion of the lower university winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A873), and the opening of the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is ended. Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A874).

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A875), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A876). ), The information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A877). Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value for the number of rounds is cleared (step A878), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information for the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A879), and the information in the big hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step A880). Thereafter, the big hit control pointer upper limit value area for storing the end value of the big hit control pointer is cleared (step A881), the big winning opening discrimination flag area is cleared (step A882), and the big hit end process transition setting process is ended. To do.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A15) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in this jackpot end process, first, the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the current special game state is set to a high probability after the special game state ends. It is determined whether the data is high probability data set when the state is reached (step A901).

  If it is not high probability data (step A901; N), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (step A902), and if it is high probability data (step A901; Y), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed (step A903). ), A probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step A904), and a command setting process (step A905) is performed.

  Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A906). Then, referring to the set production mode information setting table, the production mode number of the production mode (production mode 2, 3 or 4) set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area. (Step A907). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A908), and the next mode transition to the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is performed. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A909).

  Here, when the effect mode to be transferred is the effect mode 2, 70 is set as the effect remaining rotation speed, as the next mode transition information, the effect mode 1 is in the normal probability state, and the effect mode 3 is in the high probability state. Is set. Further, when the effect mode to be transferred is effect mode 3 that constitutes the specific effect mode described above, the effect remaining rotational speed is not set, and the no-update code is set for the next mode change information. Further, when the effect mode to be transferred is effect mode 4, 4 is set as the effect remaining rotation speed, and effect mode 3 is set as the next mode transition information.

  Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A910), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A911), and command setting processing (step A912) is performed. Then, special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step A913), and the big hit end process is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 66 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A902) in the above jackpot end process. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A921), and a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A922).

  Next, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A923), and the special figure low probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A924). After that, the probability information command (short time) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A925), the initial value (eg, 70) of the time reduction fluctuation number is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A926), and the big hit ends The setting process 1 ends.

  By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state. In addition, by setting an initial value (eg, 70) of the time variation number in the time variation region, the time reduction state ends when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (eg, 70 times).

[Big jackpot end setting 2]
FIG. 67 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A903) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A931), and a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

  Next, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A933), and the special figure high probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A934). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A935), the time reduction variation frequency area is cleared (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By the above processing, after the special game state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result mode is derived.

  That is, the game control device 100 has a probability setting means capable of setting a high probability state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes a special result mode is higher than the normal probability state after the special game state is finished, When the high probability state is set, the setting unit maintains the high probability state until the next special result mode is derived. In addition, after the special game state ends, the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (short-time state) that can extend a period during which the normal variation prize-winning device 37 is open for a predetermined period. It serves as state generation control means. It can also be said that the game control device 100 constitutes a game state control means for setting any one of the normal game state and the specific game state in which the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than the normal game state. .

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
FIG. 68 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A913) in the big hit end process described above. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A941), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A942). .

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A943), and a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A944). Subsequently, the information of the probability variation determination flag area is cleared (step A945), the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A946), and the number in the game state display number area is a short time number. Is saved (step A947). Then, a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period flag area is saved (step A948), and a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period flag area is saved (step A949). The normal process transition setting process 3 ends.

[Normal game processing]
Next, details of the usual game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  As shown in FIG. 69, in the ordinary game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a and the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the usual game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the usual game processing timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the usual game process timer has become 0 (step B4).

  If the value of the normal game process timer is 0 (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time is up or has already been up, the normal figure referred to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. A process of setting the game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table (step B6). Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step B7), the game branch process (step B8) is performed according to the game process number.

  In step B8, if the game process number is “0”, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game is monitored, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game, the setting of effects, A usual figure process (step B9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. If the game process number is “1” in step B8, a normal map change process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process is performed.

  In step B8, if the game process number is “2”, if the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the electric power depending on whether or not the time reduction state is in progress, A general map display process (step B11) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map process is performed. In step B8, if the game process number is “3”, the process during the normal map process for setting the information necessary to continue the process during the normal map process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process ( Step B12) is performed.

  If the game process number is “4” in step B8, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the end process for each normal figure. If the game process number is “5” in step B8, a normal figure end process (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (step B9) is performed.

  Then, after preparing a general pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B15), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B16) ) To complete the usual game process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). When there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), the number of common chart holds is acquired and it is determined whether the number of common chart holds is less than the upper limit (step B102).

  When the number of reserved maps is less than the upper limit (step B102; Y), the number of reserved maps is updated by +1 (step B103), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved maps is calculated. (Step B104). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B105), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B102 that the number of pending drawings is not less than the upper limit value (step B102; N). Ends the gate switch monitoring process.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power prize winning switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, it is during the ordinary figure, that is, the ordinary figure changing display game is in the winning state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations. It is determined whether or not there is (step B121). Then, when it is normal (step B121; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122), and there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122; Y). If it is determined, the count of the utility counter is updated by +1 (step B123).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter has reached an upper limit (for example, 9) (step B124), and it is determined that the count has reached the upper limit (step B124; Y). Then, the pointer (the value at which the hit ends) is loaded from the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal hit (step B125). Then, the loaded pointer is saved in the normal control pointer area per ordinary figure (step B126), the ordinary figure game processing timer is cleared (step B127), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a pay-per-use prize exceeding the upper limit value during the normal hit state, the hit end value is saved in the middle control processing pointer area at that time, and the normal hit state is not complete. Let it finish.

  Further, when it is determined in step B121 that the map is not being hit (step B121; N), if it is determined in step B122 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122; N), or step B124. When it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B124; N), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure usual process (step B9) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, in the usual figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of usual figure hold is 0 (step B131). If the number of usual figure hold is 0 (step B131; Y), The normal process transition setting process 1 (step B152) is performed, and the normal process is terminated. In addition, when the usual figure hold number is not 0 (step B131; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM common figure random number storage area (for hold number 1) (step B132), and the usual figure change display game is executed. It is determined whether the probability of the hit result is a normal high probability that is higher than usual, that is, whether the time is short (step B133).

  When it is not the time of the normal high probability (step B133; N), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value that is the determination value at the time of the normal low probability (step B134). If the value of the winning random number does not match the low probability determination value (step B134; N), the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (step B135), and the shift stop symbol number is set in the normal stop symbol (step B135). B136), the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common figure is cleared to 0 (step B141). On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value (step B134; Y), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B139), and the hit stop symbol number is set to the normal stop symbol. (Step B140), the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (Step B149).

  In step B133, when the normal probability is high (step B133; Y), the high probability lower limit determination in which the value of the hit random number is a lower limit value among a plurality of consecutive determination values used at the time of the normal probability. If the value of the hit random number is not less than the high probability lower limit determination value (step B137; N), a plurality of consecutive determinations to be used when the hit random number value is normally high probability It is determined whether the value is larger than the high probability upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value (step B138).

  If the value of the hit random number is not larger than the high probability upper limit determination value (step B138; N), that is, if it is a win, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B139), and the hit stop symbol is hit by the normal stop symbol A number is set (step B140), and the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (step B141). Further, when the value of the hit random number is less than the high probability lower limit determination value at Step B137 (Step B137; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value at Step B138 (Step B138; Y ), That is, in the case of a deviation, the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (step B135), the deviation stop symbol number is set in the usual figure stop symbol (step B136), and the random number storage area per ordinary figure (holding number 1) Is cleared to 0 (step B141). That is, the determination value that determines that the hit of the normal figure is the same when the values of the hit random numbers coincide with each other is a single value when the normal figure has a low probability, and a plurality of continuous values when the normal figure has a high probability.

  After clearing the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per usual figure to 0 (step B141), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B142). Then, a decorative common figure variation pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol is prepared (step B143), and a command setting process (step B144) is performed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the common map display game on the main display device 41 or the like.

  After that, the random number storage area per usual figure is shifted (step B145), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B146), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B147). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game related to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the reserved number 1 I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, it is determined whether the power transmission support is in progress (during the short-time state) (step B148). If the power transmission support is not in progress (step B148; N), the fluctuation time when there is no power transmission support (for example, 10 seconds) ) Is set (step B149). Further, when the power transmission support is in progress (step B148; Y), a normal map change time (for example, 1 second) at the time of power transmission support is set (step B150). Then, the normal chart process transition setting process (step B151) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Usual map transition setting process 1]
FIG. 73 shows the normal daily process transition setting process 1 (step B152) in the above normal normal process. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B161), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B161). B162). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B163), and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 74 shows the process transition setting process (step B151) during the normal map change in the above normal map normal process. In the process for setting the process for changing the normal map, first, “1” is set as a process number for shifting to the process for changing the normal map (step B171), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B171). Step B172). Thereafter, a signal related to the start of the normal map change display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B173), and a changing flag indicating that the normal figure change display game is changing is saved in the normal figure change control flag area. (Step B174). Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the general display indicator, is saved in the general flashing control timer area (step B175), and the transition processing setting process for the normal map change process is performed. finish.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process during normal map change (step B10) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the normal map changing process, a general map display process transition setting process (step B180) is performed. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the normal map display process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the general map display process (step B181). Is saved in the usual game process number area (step B182). After that, a general map display time (for example, 0.6 seconds) that is a display time of the result of the general map change display game on the general map display is set (step B183), and the normal map display time is set as the general game display Save in the timer area (step B184). Further, a signal related to the end of the normal change is saved in the test signal output data area (step B185), and a stop flag indicating that the normal change display game is stopped is saved in the normal change control flag area ( In step B186), the normal diagram display process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B11) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the process for displaying a normal map, first, a hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal process is loaded (step B201), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (Step B202), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (Step B203).

  When the hit flag is not hit information (step B203; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B212) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated. This normal / normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B203; Y), it is determined whether or not the power transmission support is being performed (during the time saving state) (step B204).

  If the normal power support is not in progress (step B204; N), the normal power open time (for example, 100 ms) when there is no general power support is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B205). In addition, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B206), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no general power support is saved. Save in the upper limit area of control pointer per figure (step B207). Thereby, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the normal operation state is set, and for example, it is possible to open twice. After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B211) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the power transmission support is in progress (step B204; Y), the power transmission release time (for example, 1352 ms) at the time of power transmission support is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B208). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during the normal call (step B209), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved to the normal map. Save in the middle control pointer upper limit area (step B210). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the short-time state is set, and for example, it is possible to open four times. After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B211) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
FIG. 77 shows a process transition setting process (step B211) during the normal map in the above-described normal map display process. In this normal process transition setting process, first, “3” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal process (step B221), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B222). After that, a signal related to the hitting of the normal map display game and a signal related to the start of the normal operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B223), and the general electric signal is output to drive (turn on) the general electric solenoid. On data is saved in the solenoid output data area (step B224).

  Further, the information on the normal power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B225), and the normal power illegality for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 during the general power fraud monitoring period. The information on the winning number area is cleared (step B226). Then, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B227), and the normal process transition setting process is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal hit process (step B12) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the normal processing per normal map, first, the control pointer during normal map is loaded and prepared (step B301), and the value of the loaded normal control pointer per normal map is controlled during the normal map control. It is determined whether or not the value in the pointer upper limit value area (the value at the end of hitting) has been reached (step B302).

  If the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (step B302; N), the control pointer during the normal map is updated by +1 (step B303), A general electric operation transition setting process (step B304) is performed, and the normal process is terminated. Further, when the value of the control pointer during the normal map reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (the value of the hit end) (step B302; Y), the process control pointer during the normal map in step B303. Without performing the process of updating (+1) the area, the normal power operation transition setting process (step B304) is performed, and the normal hit process is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
FIG. 79 shows the normal power operation transition setting process (step B304) in the above-described normal process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer. In this normal power operation transition setting process, first, a branching process corresponding to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B311).

  If the value of the control pointer is 0, 3, 5, or 7, the process proceeds to step B312 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The waiting time after closing (for example, 2800 ms or 1000 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B312), and the off data is set in the general power solenoid output data area to turn off the general power solenoid 37c ( Step B313), the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is 1, 4, 6, or 8, the process proceeds to step B314 to control the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The normal power release time (for example, 100 ms, 5200 ms, or 1352 ms), which is the open time of 37, is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B314), and the normal power solenoid output is used to turn on the general power solenoid 37c. On data is set in the data area (step B315), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is either 2 or 9, the process goes to step B316 to complete the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B13). Then, “4” is set as the process number (step B316). Then, this processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step B317), and the ordinary electric ball remaining time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B318). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B319), and the general electric operation transition setting process is ended.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), in the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, an end process shift setting process (step B400) is performed. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in the universal chart end process transition setting process, first, a process number “5” related to the universal chart end process is set (step B401), and the process number is set to the regular game process. Save in the number area (step B402).

  Thereafter, the ordinary ending time is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B403), and a signal related to the end of the operation of the ordinary variation winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data region (step B404). The normal power count number area for counting the number of winnings to 37 is cleared (step B405). Then, the normal control pointer area is cleared (step B406), the normal control pointer upper limit value area is cleared (step B407), and the normal figure end process transition setting process ends.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B14) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the normal figure end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B500) is performed. As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B501), and the process number is set as the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B502).

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the normal game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B503), and a flag for specifying the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (flag during fraud monitoring period) is monitored. Save in the period flag area (step B504), and the usual process transition setting process 2 ends.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third gaming state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the segment LED editing process, first, a general chart hold number table in which a display mode on the general map hold display is defined is set (step S501), and display data corresponding to the general map hold number is displayed. Is acquired and saved in the segment area of the usual figure hold display (step S502). Next, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined is set (step S503), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired, and the special figure 1 hold display is obtained. The data is saved in the segment area of the container (step S504).

  Thereafter, a special figure 2 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined is set (step S505), and display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired to obtain the special figure 2 hold indicator. Are saved in the segment area (step S506). Furthermore, a round display LED display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (step S507), and display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area of the round display unit ( Step S508).

  Next, a game state display table in which display modes on the first game state display unit 57 and the second game state display unit 58 are defined is set (step S509), and display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired. Are saved in the segment area of each game state display section (step S510). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the high probability notification flag related to notification that the probability state of jackpot is a high probability state at the time of power failure recovery (step S511). If the high-probability notification flag is on (step S511; Y), that is, if the high-probability state is being notified, the segment LED editing process is terminated. If the high probability notification flag is not on (step S511; N), the off data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area of the third gaming state display unit (step S512), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. To do.

  Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing and radio wave fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraud will be described. In some cases, a fraudulent act for illegally obtaining a game value may be performed on a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined game value according to a game result. Among such fraudulent acts, gaming machines equipped with a mechanism for detecting fraudulent acts using magnets are conventionally known. There are various types of fraud, and detection methods and conditions corresponding to each type are necessary. However, the occurrence of an abnormal condition could not be accurately detected. In particular, misjudgment that an abnormal condition has occurred despite not having an abnormal condition leading to fraudulent behavior, and notifying it, etc., cause distrust of the player and a factor to avoid games on the gaming machine Therefore, it is important not to perform such erroneous detection of an abnormal state. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, an abnormal state is accurately generated based on a magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, a radio wave detector that detects abnormal radio waves, and detection results of the magnetic detector and radio wave detector. For example, the following magnet fraud monitoring process and radio wave fraud monitoring process are performed for the purpose of avoiding erroneous detection of, for example, an abnormal state.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 serving as a magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, and fraud notification is started and ended.

  As shown in FIG. 83, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). Is on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism is detected (step S601). If the magnet sensor is on (step S601; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 to determine whether the timer has expired. Determination is made (step S603).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value is set. Save in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as an abnormal state detection control unit that detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor switch 61). In the case of a magnetic detector, when abnormal magnetism is detected continuously for a predetermined period, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (step S601; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud notification time is reached. Is updated by -1 if the magnet fraud notification timer that prescribes is not 0 (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step S610; Y), that is, when the time has been up or when the time has already expired, and when the fraud notification period has ended, If not, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

  And when the prepared magnet fraud flag corresponds with the value of a magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), a magnet fraud monitoring process is complete | finished. If the values do not match (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), command setting processing is performed (step S615), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing is terminated. .

[Radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 that detects an abnormal radio wave, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a, the radio wave is monitored. It is determined whether the sensor 62 is on, that is, whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). If the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

  Then, a radio fraud notification command is prepared (step S703), a radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step S704), and it is determined whether the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area. (Step S709). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as an abnormal state detection control unit that detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the radio wave detector (the radio wave sensor 62). In the case of a radio wave detector, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred once an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, if the radio wave sensor is not on (step S701; N), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, -1 is updated unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is 0 (step S701). S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step S706).

  When the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step S706; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or when the time has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period ends, If not, a command for terminating radio fraud notification is prepared (step S707), a radio fraud cancel flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step S708), and the prepared radio fraud flag is a value in the radio fraud flag area. (Step S709).

  If the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the radio fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step S709; N), the prepared radio fraud flag is saved in the radio fraud flag area (step S710), command setting processing is performed (step S711), and radio fraud monitoring processing is terminated. .

  By performing the magnet fraud monitoring process and the radio wave fraud monitoring process as described above, it is possible to accurately detect the occurrence of an abnormal state. In other words, the gaming machine is equipped with a component that generates magnetism, such as a solenoid, but when a magnetism is detected continuously for a predetermined period, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. Can be prevented from being erroneously detected as an abnormal state. On the other hand, since the gaming machine is not equipped with a component that emits radio waves, it is possible to minimize damage by immediately determining that an abnormal radio wave is detected as an abnormal state.

  In the present embodiment, the detection of abnormal magnetism is simply a state in which magnetism is detected, but it may be a state in which magnetism stronger than the magnetic state in a state that is not in an abnormal state is detected, or magnetism that exceeds a predetermined threshold value. The detected state may be abnormal. Also, in this embodiment, abnormal radio waves are detected simply by receiving radio waves. However, frequencies that are not received in an abnormal state or in a state that is not abnormal, or frequencies that are not received in an abnormal state. It is good also as the state which received the electric wave of. Moreover, it is good also considering the state which detected the electromagnetic wave whose intensity | strength is a predetermined threshold value or more, or the electromagnetic wave of a specific frequency as abnormality. When the threshold value is set based on the strength of the magnetic field, the strength of the radio wave, or the frequency, a signal may be output when the threshold value is exceeded on the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62 side, or the threshold value may be set on the control device side. You may make it monitor whether it exceeded.

  From the above, the detection results of the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor switch 61) that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector (radio wave sensor 62) that detects abnormal radio waves, and the magnetic detector and radio wave detector And an abnormal state detection control means (game control device 100) for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state, and in the case of a magnetic detector, the abnormal state detection control means continuously detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. However, in the case of a radio wave detector, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred once an abnormal radio wave is detected.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S104), the prize opening switch / error monitoring process (step S107), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111), and the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S112). Then, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set the information in an output buffer is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 85, in the external information editing process, first, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S801) for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start opening signal for editing a winning opening winning signal. Edit processing (step S802) is performed. Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not 0, -1 is updated (step S803). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (step S804).

  When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is 0 (step S804; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area ( Step S805). On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not 0 (step S804; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the on data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S806). Thereafter, processing for setting information according to the error state and the security state is performed.

  In the process of setting information according to the error state or the security state, first, a security signal for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch or the like. If the control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S807). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808).

  When the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step S808; N), that is, when the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S818), and the gaming machine error status signal Is saved in the test signal output data area (step S819), and the external information editing process is terminated. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  Further, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, a glass frame open error is occurring (step S809; Y), and the front frame An open error is occurring (step S810; Y), a lower prize winning fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), an upper winning prize fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), and an ordinary electric power fraud is occurring (step S813; Y) ), When the magnet fraud is occurring (step S814; Y) or radio wave fraud is occurring (step S815; Y), the ON signal of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S818), and the gaming machine error state The signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area (step S819), and the external information editing process is terminated. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808; Y) and no error has occurred (steps S809 to S815; N), the off-data of the security signal is used as external information. The data is saved in the output data area (step S816), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S801) in the external information editing process described above will be described. The main prize ball signal editing process is a main prize ball signal that is generated each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out, planned number of game media payouts) generated by winning a prize at the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). Is output to the external device.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step S822). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step S822; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step S823).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step S823; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step S824), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is output. The control timer initial value is saved (step S825). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S827), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step S823; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S823). S828), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step S822; N), it is determined whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S826). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S826; Y), the process proceeds to step S827. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S826; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S828), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information related to the scheduled game medium payout number is transmitted to the outside. After the payout condition based on the winning of the game ball is established, it is faster to generate and send the main prize ball signal than to operate the payout device and complete the payout of the game ball. Between the time when the payout condition is satisfied and the time when the number of game media to be paid out is paid out, information related to the planned number of game media payouts, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is output to the outside. That is, the game control device 100 can output information on the planned number of game media payouts, which is the number of game media to be paid out, after the payout conditions are satisfied and before paying out the number of game media to be paid out. To provide an external output means.

  However, if the number of award balls generated is small and this is added to the value of the remaining number of award balls and does not reach a predetermined number (for example, 10), information on the expected number of game medium payouts after the actual payout is completed May be output. By reducing the unit of the number of scheduled game media payouts corresponding to one main prize ball signal (for example, 1), after the payout condition is always satisfied, the game media of the number of payouts is paid out. It is also possible to output information related to the planned number of game media payouts that is the number of game media scheduled to be paid out.

  Based on the above, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media and control means (game control) for controlling the payout device to pay out a predetermined amount of game media based on establishment of a predetermined payout condition In the gaming machine including the device 100 and the payout control device 200), the control means is the number of game media to be paid out after the payout condition is satisfied and before the payout number of game media is paid out. This means that external output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting information on the number of scheduled game medium payouts to the outside is provided. Note that it is also possible to apply this configuration to a slot machine using a game medium as a medal.

  Further, the external output means (game control device 100) is based on the storage means (game control device 100) having a game medium storage area for storing the number of scheduled game medium payouts that have not been output to the outside, and the establishment of the payout condition. Addition means (game control device 100) for adding the scheduled game medium payout number corresponding to the established payout condition to the game medium storage area, and the predetermined game medium payout number stored in the game medium storage area has reached a predetermined number Based on this, the transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of scheduled game medium payouts to the outside, and the predetermined number of scheduled game medium payout numbers transmitted by the transmission means are subtracted from the game medium storage area. Subtracting means (game control device 100).

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step S802) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step S832). If the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the start port signal output count is 0 (step S833).

  If the start port signal output count is not 0 (step S833; N), the start port signal output count is updated by -1 (step S834), and the start port signal output control timer initial value is entered in the start port signal output control timer area. Is saved (step S835). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the OFF state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal ( For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the start port signal editing process is terminated. If the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step S833; Y), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S838). Then, the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (step S832; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). Note that the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S836; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S838), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  Next, control executed by the payout control device 200 will be described. In the payout control apparatus 200, a payout main process shown in FIG. 88 is performed.

[Payout main processing]
The payout main process is started when the power is turned on. In this payout main process, first, an interrupt prohibition process (step C1) is performed, then an interrupt vector setting process (step C2) for setting a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs, and an interrupt process. Interrupt mode setting processing (step C3) for setting the mode is performed.

  Next, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step C4), and all output ports are set to off (no output) (step C5). Thereafter, when an interrupt occurs, a stack pointer setting process (step C6) for setting a stack pointer which is a head address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like is performed, and a process for setting a serial port is performed (step C7).

  Then, all work areas before the access-prohibited area are cleared (step C8), all stack areas after the access-prohibited area are cleared (step C9), and areas related to input control, output signal, and reception buffer are reset. (Step C10). Next, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal is activated (step C11). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the payout control apparatus 200. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator, and a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU in the payout control device 200 based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal.

  Thereafter, interruption is permitted (step C12), and payout related data reception processing (step C13) is performed. As shown in FIG. 90, in the payout-related data receiving process, first, the reception of payout-related data is waited (step C31). The payout-related data is data that the payout control device 200 transmits to the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs and is backed up by the game control device 100, and is transmitted from the game control device 100 when the power is turned on. ing. This payout-related data includes switch input information, requested payout number based on prize ball number data from the game control device 100, information on the reception buffer, and information on the number of game balls that have been paid out as information when a power failure occurs. Information on the number of prize balls to be paid out, data on the number of game balls that have not been paid out, and the like. When there is no backed up data in the game control device 100, empty data is transmitted as the payout related data when the power is turned on.

  When this payout-related data is received (step C31; Y), the received payout-related data is stored in the corresponding storage area (step C32), and the payout-related data received data is transmitted to the game control device 100 ( Step C33), the payout related data receiving process is terminated. After performing this payout related data reception process, as shown in FIG. 89, a firing control determination process is performed to determine whether or not a game ball can be launched (step C14).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the ball lending control mode for discharging the game ball is in progress based on the ball lending information from the card unit (step C15). When the ball lending mode is set (step C15; Y), the ball lending control process (step C19) is performed, the payout control process (step C21) is performed, and the error notification editing process (step C22) is performed. By this ball lending control process (step C19) and the payout control process (step C21), a predetermined number of game balls are discharged based on the lending information transmitted from the card unit when the player performs a lending operation. .

  On the other hand, when it is not in the ball lending control mode (step C15; N), it is in the prize ball control mode in which the game balls are discharged based on the winning ball number data transmitted from the game control device 100 due to the occurrence of winning in the winning opening. It is determined whether or not there is (step C16). If the prize ball control mode is in effect (step C16; Y), a prize ball control process (step C20) is performed, a payout control process (step C21) is performed, and an error notification editing process (step C22) is performed. By the prize ball control process (step C20) and the payout control process (step C21), a predetermined number of game balls are discharged based on the prize ball number data transmitted from the game control device 100 when a prize is awarded to the prize opening. .

  When the prize ball control mode is not being executed (step C16; N), a payout excessive error monitoring process (step C17) for monitoring the occurrence of an error of excessively paying out game balls is performed, and a payout device control start determination process (step C17). C18) is performed, and error notification editing processing (step C22) is performed. In the payout device control start determination process, as shown in FIG. 91, it is determined whether or not an excessive payout error is occurring (step C41). If the excessive payout error is present (step C41; Y), the payout device control start determination is performed. The process ends. If it is not in the excessive payout error (step C41; N), a prize ball control start determination process (step C42) for determining whether or not to start payout control for prize balls is performed, and whether or not to start payout control for balls A ball lending control start determination process (step C43) is performed to end the payout device control start determination process.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the prize ball control start determination process, first, among the number of game balls to be paid out based on the prize ball number data, the payout side unpaid number, which is the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out, is calculated. It is determined whether it is 0 (step C51). When the payout-side unpaid number is 0 (step C51; Y), the prize ball control start determination process is terminated. If the number of unpaid on the payout side is not 0 (step C51; N), it is determined whether the payout is prohibited (step C52).

  When the payout is prohibited (step C52; Y), the winning ball control start determination process is terminated. If the payout is not prohibited (step C52; N), it is determined whether or not the shot ball cut switch is in an unconfirmed state (step C53). If the shot ball cut switch is in an unconfirmed state (step C53; Y), that is, if the ball is cut, the award ball control start determination process ends. If the shot ball cut switch is not in an unconfirmed state (step C53; N), that is, if the ball is not out, it is determined whether the overflow switch is in an unconfirmed state (step C54).

  If the overflow switch is not in the indeterminate state (step C54; N), that is, if it is overflowing, the winning ball control start determination process is terminated. If the overflow switch is in the indeterminate state (step C54; Y), that is, if it is not overflowing, the prize ball control mode is set to the payout device control mode (step C55), and the prize ball control start determination process is performed. finish. Thereby, the payout control of the prize ball is started.

  In the ball lending control start determination process (step C43) shown in FIG. 91, a prize is substituted for the determination (step C51) as to whether or not the payout side unpaid number in the award ball control start determination process shown in FIG. 92 is zero. It is determined whether or not the ball control mode is set, and if the prize ball control mode is not set, the processes from step C52 to C54 are performed. If the overflow switch is in an indeterminate state (step C54; Y), that is, if it is not overflowing, the ball lending control mode is set in the payout device control mode and the ball lending control start determination process is terminated. .

  Returning to FIG. 89, after performing the error notification editing process (step C22), it is determined whether or not the power failure detection signal 1 is OFF (step C23). The change of the power failure detection signal 1 from ON to OFF is defined as a first power failure detection signal, and the occurrence of a power failure is detected by receiving the first power failure detection signal. If the power failure detection signal 1 is not OFF (step C23; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the process returns to the firing control determination process (step C14). Moreover, when the power failure detection signal 1 is OFF (step C23; Y), that is, when a power failure occurs and the first power failure detection signal is received, a power failure related data transmission process (step C24) is performed.

  In the power-related payout-related data transmission process (step C24), the current switch input information, the requested payout number based on the prize ball number data from the game control device 100, the information of the reception buffer, the number of game balls that have been paid out A process of transmitting to the game control device 100 payout-related data including information on the prize ball payout number area including the information and unpaid-out number data that is information on the number of game balls that have not been paid out is performed. Thereafter, interrupts are prohibited (step C25), all output ports are turned off (step C26), access to the RWM is prohibited (step C27), and waiting for the power supply of the gaming machine to be cut off. Note that the processing of steps C24 to C27 is completed within a first predetermined time, which is the time during which the dispensing control device 200 can operate from the drop to the first voltage. That is, the payout control device 200 serves as a power failure processing means for transmitting the unpaid number data in the unpaid number storage means to the game control device 100 within the first predetermined time based on reception of the first power failure detection signal.

[Prize ball control processing]
The payout control apparatus 200 performs the process shown in FIG. 93 in the prize ball control process (step C20) in the payout main process shown in FIG. In this prize ball control process, first, a prize ball process number is loaded (step C61), and a branch process based on the process number is performed (step C62). If the process number is 0, a prize ball payout start process (step C63) for starting payout of prize balls according to the prize ball number data is performed. If the process number is 1, a prize ball payout retry determination process (step C64) is performed. If the process number is 2, a prize ball payout shortage error release waiting process (step C65) is performed. If the process number is 3, a prize ball payout termination process (step C66) is completed to complete the payout of prize balls according to the prize ball number data.

[Prize ball start processing]
FIG. 94 shows the above-mentioned prize ball payout start process (step C63). In the prize ball payout start process, a payout motor control process (step C71) is performed to control a motor of the payout unit to pay out a predetermined number of game balls according to the prize ball number data. 1 which is the number of the payout retry determination process is set (step C72), and the prize ball payout start process is ended. With this process, a predetermined number of game balls according to the winning ball number data are paid out.

[Prize ball closing process]
FIG. 95 shows the above-described prize ball payout termination process (step C66). This winning ball payout ending process is performed when the paying out of the winning ball corresponding to the winning ball number data is completed. In the winning ball payout termination process, first, the detection payout number monitoring flag is cleared (step C81), and it is determined whether or not an excessive ball that is an excessively paid out game ball is detected (step C82). If there is an excess sphere detected (step C82; Y), the initial position determination operation is set in the payout motor control state (step C83), and the excess sphere detection flag is cleared (step C85). If no excess sphere is detected (step C82; N), the basic operation is set in the payout motor control state (step C84), and the excess sphere detection flag is cleared (step C85).

  Thereafter, a payout completion signal is transmitted to the game control device 100 (step C86), and a prize ball payout number update process (step C87) for setting information regarding the number of game balls that have been paid out for transmission to the external device is performed. Then, 0, which is a prize ball payout start process number, is set in the prize ball processing number (step C88), the standby operation mode is set in the payout device control mode (step C89), and the prize ball payout termination process is terminated. To do. With this processing, a payout completion signal is transmitted to the game control device 100 every time a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to the prize ball number data. That is, the payout control device 200 serves as a payout completion signal transmitting means for sending a payout completion signal indicating that payout of the number of game balls corresponding to the winning ball number data has been completed to the game control device 100.

[Prize ball payout update processing]
FIG. 96 shows the prize ball payout number update process (step C87) in the above-described prize ball payout termination process. In the prize ball payout number update process, the prize ball payout number update process outputs a prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls paid out (game medium payout number) reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). Set. As described above, the main award ball signal related to the scheduled game medium payout number is separately transmitted to the external device. By comparing these two signals, the external device can check the planned game medium payout number and the game. The number of medium payouts can be collated, and an abnormal state in which a game medium is paid out without establishment of a payout condition can be detected.

  As shown in FIG. 96, in the prize ball payout number update process, first, the number of payouts is added to the value in the prize ball payout number area (step C91). As the value of the prize ball payout number area before this processing, a fraction that has not reached a predetermined number as a reference for the output of the prize ball signal is stored, and in this process, the value of the prize ball payout number area is paid out. Add the value of the number of game balls completed. Then, the added value is saved in the prize ball payout number area (step C92).

  That is, since the prize ball payout number area forms a storage area for storing the number of game medium payouts that have not been output to the outside, the payout control device 200 serves as a storage means. Also, the payout control device 200 serves as an adding means for adding the number of game medium payouts corresponding to the number of game balls paid out to the storage area based on completion of payout of the prize balls.

  Thereafter, 10 which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the prize ball signal is subtracted from the value of the prize ball payout number area (step C93), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step C94). When the subtraction result is not equal to or greater than 0 (step C94; N), the winning ball payout number updating process is terminated. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step C94; Y), the value of the prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step C95), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball payout number area (step C96). ), And returns to Step C93.

  That is, the payout control device 200 serves as a transmission means for transmitting the predetermined number of game medium payouts to the outside based on the fact that the number of game medium payouts stored in the storage area has reached a predetermined number. Also, the payout control device 200 serves as a subtracting means for subtracting a predetermined number of game medium payout numbers transmitted from the transmitting means from the storage area. Further, after the payout control device 200 pays out the number of game media to be paid out, the payout control device 200 constitutes a payout number external output means capable of outputting information related to the game media payout number, which is the number of game media paid out. In the present embodiment, one prize ball signal is transmitted corresponding to a predetermined number of game medium payouts. In this award ball payout number update process, the process up to the setting of a prize ball signal is performed, and transmission is performed by a separate process (not shown).

  As described above, the payout number external output means (payout control device 200) is provided that can output information on the number of game medium payouts, which is the number of game media paid out, after paying out the number of game media to be paid out. Will be.

  Note that the game control device 100 transmits information related to the scheduled game medium payout number that is the number of game balls to be paid out to the external device, and the payout control device 200 externally transmits information related to the game medium payout number that is the number of game balls that have been paid out. The information is transmitted to the device, but either the game control device 100 or the payout control device 200 may transmit it.

  In addition, during a period in which the number of prize balls is paid out (during MY), such as during a special game state or a short-time state, a main prize ball signal that is information related to the scheduled game medium payout number and a prize that is information related to the game medium payout number Both ball signals may be output, and only the award ball signal, which is information relating to the number of game medium payouts, may be output during other periods.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. As described above, the effect control device 300 includes the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 that performs video control under the control of the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 performs the 1st main process shown in FIG.

[1st main processing]
In the 1st main process, as shown in FIG. 97, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step D1), and various initialization processes such as CPU initialization, RAM initial value setting, random number initialization, and the like are performed (step D2). Then, various interrupt timers are started (step D3), and interrupts are permitted (step D4).

  In this 1st main process, a loop process is then performed as the main loop process. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step D5), and effect button input processing (step D6) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is performed. . Next, a game control command analysis process (step D7) is performed. In this game control command analysis process, it is determined whether or not a command related to the game transmitted from the game control device 100 has been correctly received. Process to classify commands for

  Next, a test mode process (step D8) that is a process related to a test mode for testing the main display device 41, the sub display device 600, the decoration device, the rendering device, and the like is performed. When the test mode is set to the test mode, the subsequent game processing is not performed. However, in the test mode, when the display on the main display device 41 or the sub display device 600, the output of sound from the speaker, the light emission of the LED of the decoration device, the operation of the effect device, or the like is performed, a process for controlling these ( Control is performed in steps D12 to D14) described later. Note that the test mode ends when the gaming machine 10 is powered off.

  Next, a 1st scene control process (step D9) related to the control of the game effect is performed, a game machine error monitoring process (step D10) for performing a process related to error notification is performed, and a command to be output to the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 An effect command editing process (step D11) is performed. Next, a sound control process (step D12) for performing control related to output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), a decoration control process (step D13) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18. ), Motor / SOL control processing (step D14) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 45 is performed. Next, a random number update process (step D15) for updating the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step D5).

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a command reception interrupt process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 will be described. In this command reception interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 98, first, a process (step D21) of taking in the port value of the command transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the MODE command is waiting (step D22). If the MODE command is waiting (step D22; Y), it is further determined whether or not the data strobe signal SSTB is ON (step D23), and the data strobe signal SSTB is ON. In the case (step D23; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is a MODE command (step D24).

  If the received command is a MODE command (step D24; Y), processing for calculating the address of the command buffer corresponding to the reception pointer (step D25) is performed, and the command is set as a MODE command at the calculated address. A process of saving (step D26) is performed. Subsequently, an initial value is set in the timeout monitoring timer, a process for starting the timer (step D27) is performed, a process for setting an ACTION command waiting state (step D28) is performed, and the command reception interrupt process is terminated. .

  In step D23, if the data strobe signal SSTB is not ON (step D23; N), or if the received command is not a MODE command in step D24 (step D24; N), the timeout monitoring timer is stopped. Processing (step D37) is performed, processing for setting a MODE command waiting state (step D38) is performed, and command reception interrupt processing is terminated.

  In step D22, when the MODE command is not waiting, that is, when the ACTION command is waiting (step D22; N), it is determined whether or not the timeout monitoring timer has timed out (step D29). If the time-out has not occurred (step D29; N), it is determined whether or not the data strobe signal SSTB is in an ON state (step D30). If the data strobe signal SSTB is in an ON state ( In step D30; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is a MODE command (step D31).

  If the received command is a MODE command (step D31; Y), the process proceeds to step D25, and the subsequent processing is performed. If the received command is not a MODE command (step D31; N), a command buffer address corresponding to the reception pointer is calculated (step D32), and the command is saved as an ACTION command at the calculated address. The process (step D33) to perform is performed. Subsequently, after performing the process of updating the value of the number of received commands by +1 (step D34), the process of stopping the timeout monitoring timer (step D37) is performed, and the process of setting the MODE command waiting state (step D38). To complete the command reception interrupt process.

  If a time-out occurs in step D29 (step D29; Y), or if the data strobe signal SSTB is not in an ON state (step D30; N) in step D30, the process proceeds to step D35, and the reception pointer is set. Processing for calculating the address of the corresponding command buffer (step D35) is performed, and processing for discarding the MODE command saved in the command buffer of the calculated address (step D36) is performed. Then, processing for stopping the timeout monitoring timer (step D37) is performed, processing for setting the MODE command waiting state (step D38) is performed, and the command reception interrupt processing is terminated.

[1st scene control processing]
Next, details of the 1st scene control process (step D9) in the 1st main process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the 1st scene control process, the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the test mode (step D51). If it is determined in step D51 that the test mode is being executed (step D51; Y), the 1st scene control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step D51 that the test mode is not in effect (step D51; N), it is determined whether a scene change command has been received (step D52). This scene change command includes various commands related to the game transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (power-on command, power failure recovery command, customer waiting demo command, change command, jackpot fanfare command, round command, interval command Etc.).

  If it is determined in step D52 that the scene change command has been received (step D52; Y), the game state to be updated (current game state) is acquired (step D53), and the current scene change command acquired is received. It is determined whether or not the game state is valid, that is, whether or not the command is valid (step D54). If it is determined in step D54 that the command is valid (step D54; Y), the received command is saved (step D55), an effect request flag is set (step D56), and the command identifier of the received command Branch processing (step D57) is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step D52 that a scene change command has not been received (step D52; N), or if it is determined that the command is not valid in step D54 (step D54; N), the command of the received command Branch processing based on the identifier (step D57) is performed. In this case, a branch is performed based on the identifier of the command that was most recently valid.

  In the branch process based on the command identifier (step D57), a process to be executed is selected based on the received command. When a power-on command is received, a power-on process (step D58) for performing a process necessary when the power is turned on is performed. When a power failure recovery command is received, a power failure recovery (other than waiting for a customer) process (step D59) is performed to perform processing necessary at the time of power failure recovery. When a customer waiting demo command is received, a customer waiting process (step D60) for performing processing related to the display of the customer waiting demo is performed.

  When a change command is received, a changing process (step D61) for performing a process related to the execution of the decoration special figure changing display game is performed. In the changing process, information necessary to play the decorative special figure changing display game is set. In the setting of information necessary for playing this decoration special figure fluctuation display game, for example, the production (fluctuation) is based on information included in the fluctuation command transmitted from the game control device 100 (whether it is a big hit, fluctuation pattern information, etc.). Set the pattern and variation time. When the stop information command is received together with the change command, a process of setting a corresponding special figure extension display time as a stop display time of the identification information in the decorative special figure change display game is also performed.

  When a fanfare command is received, a big hit fanfare process (step D62), which is a process related to the start of the special game state, is performed. When a round command is received, a big hit round process (step D63), which is a process related to a round game, is performed. When an interval command is received, a big hit interval process (step D64) which is a process related to the interval between rounds is performed. When an ending command is received, a jackpot ending process (step D65), which is a process related to the end of the special gaming state, is performed.

  After performing each of the above-described processes selected by the branch process using the command identifier (step D57), a process based on a command that is not immediately reflected in the video is performed. As this process, first, a hold number command reception process (step D66) is performed in which a process based on a hold number command (special figure 1 hold number command, special figure 2 hold number command) including information related to increase / decrease of the start memory is performed. A decoration special figure command reception process (step D67) is performed for performing a process based on a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol of the figure variation display game.

  Next, based on a probability information command including information on a probability state (a high probability state, a short time state, or a normal state that is neither of these), a corresponding value is internally set and a background command is sent to the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312. Probability information command reception processing (step D68) for performing transmission processing is performed. Next, based on a pre-determination command (a pre-reading symbol command, a pre-reading variation pattern command) including a result of a pre-reading process for pre-determining the result of the special symbol variation display game based on the start-up memory before the execution of the special symbol variation display game A pre-determination process (step D69) for performing the process is performed. Then, based on the effect mode command, an effect mode setting process related to the effect setting according to the set effect mode is performed (step C70), and the 1st scene control process is terminated. Thus, by performing the probability information command reception process (step D68) before the prior determination process (step D69) and monitoring the change of the probability information, it is possible to perform a highly reliable prior determination.

[Fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the changing process (step D61) in the first scene control process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 100, in the changing process, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not there is an effect request flag (step D81). The effect request flag is a flag that is set when a valid command is received. When there is this flag, processing based on the received command is performed.

  If it is determined in step D81 that there is an effect request flag (step D81; Y), the PB information that is information related to the input of the effect button 25 is cleared (step D82), and the movable body request set process (step D83). I do. Next, a variation effect pattern setting process (step D84) for setting details of the variation effect pattern is performed based on the variation command, stop information command, effect mode, and the like from the game control device 100.

  Then, an accessory action pattern setting process (step D85) is performed, and a plurality of special figure fluctuations are targeted for a notice effect about the special figure fluctuation display game being executed and a start memory that has not yet executed the special figure fluctuation display game. A notice effect setting process (step D86) is performed for setting a continuous notice to continuously produce effects in the display game. Thereafter, random number seed initialization processing (step D87) is performed, and a scene sequence table corresponding to the set variation pattern is set (step D88). The scene sequence table is a table for managing the execution timing and time of various displays such as the start and stop of the variable display and the display of the effect character in the decoration special figure variable display game. In the scene sequence table, the execution order of a plurality of scenes in which execution contents and time are defined is set, and the decorative special figure variation display game is executed by sequentially executing the scenes according to the scene sequence table.

  Next, a variation time setting process (step D89) for setting the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game is performed, and the first scene and the scene update timer are set (step D90). Then, the effect request flag is cleared (step D91), and the changing process is terminated. Through these processes, in the effect control device 300, based on the control data (variation display start information) from the game control device 100, the information (execution mode and effect content) of the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. ) Is set, and the decorative special figure variation display game is started. In other words, the production control device 300 starts the variable display game (decorative special map variable display game) by receiving the variable display start information. The game control device 100 sets a variation pattern according to the effect mode. However, when a variation pattern common to each effect mode is set, the effect content used by the effect control device 300 is set according to the effect mode. To do.

  If it is determined in step D81 that there is no effect request flag (step D81; N), it is determined whether or not the value of the scene update timer is 0 (step D92). The scene update timer measures the execution time of the scene managed according to the scene sequence table, and the value of this scene update timer being 0 indicates that the scene being executed has ended.

  When it is determined in step D92 that the value of the scene update timer is not 0 (step D92; N), an accessory for setting the operation of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, the board effect device 44, and the frame effect device 45. Operation control processing (step D94) is performed. Then, the variation time management process (step D95 is performed) for managing the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game, and the process during variation are ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step D92 that the value of the scene update timer is 0 (step D92; Y), the next normal scene data is set (step D93). As a result, a new scene is started and a predetermined value corresponding to the scene is set in the scene update timer. Then, an accessory operation control process (step D94) is performed, a variable time management process (step D95) is performed, and the variable process is terminated.

  Next, details of the changing time setting process (step D89) and the changing time management process (step D95) in the above-described changing process will be described. Conventionally, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) are displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display) based on winning at a starting winning opening (start winning opening 36. A variation display game (special map variation display game or decoration special map variation display game) that displays variation (scroll display) on the device, etc., and the result mode (stop symbol) of this variation display game has become a specific mode In relation to the above, there is known a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) that gives a specific gaming value such as generating a bonus game. Such a gaming machine includes a game control device that comprehensively controls the game, and a display control device (effect control device) that controls a variable display game on the display device based on command information (command command) from the game control device. And comprising.

  In such a gaming machine, when the display control device receives the change start command and the symbol command transmitted from the game control device, the display control device starts the change display game. After that, when the display control device receives the symbol stop command transmitted from the game control device after the time predetermined by the variation pattern has elapsed, the display control device stops the variation display game being performed on the display device, and displays the display result. I try to derive.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the game control device needs to transmit a symbol stop command to the display control device when the variation time of the variable display game ends, an extra control load is imposed on the game control device. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the game is controlled in an integrated manner, and based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the execution of the variable display game for displaying the result form after the main display device 41 displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner is started. Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting variable display start information for commanding, and display control means (effect control device 300) for executing a variable display game based on the variable display start information. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player in relation to the result mode of the display game being a special result mode, the burden of control is reduced.

[Variation time setting process]
As shown in FIG. 101, in the variation time setting process, first, the variation time is acquired based on the variation command forming the variation display start information (step D101), and a value corresponding to the variation time is set in the variation timer (step D102). ). Next, it is determined whether the stop information command is received together with the change command (step D103). If it is received (step D103; Y), the extended stop time is acquired based on the stop information command (step D104). Then, a value corresponding to the extended stop time is set in the stop time timer (step D105), and the variation time setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the stop information command has not been received (step D103; N), a value corresponding to the normal stop time is set during the stop time zone (step D106), and the variation time setting process is terminated. That is, when the stop extension information is not received as the variable display start information, a normal stop time that is a predetermined fixed stop time is set, and when the stop extension information is received, the stop extension information is determined. The stop time (special figure extension display time 1 or special figure extension display time 2) is set.

  From the above, when the game control means (game control device 100) extends the stop time for stopping and displaying the result mode, the stop extension information corresponding to the extended time is displayed in a variable manner as the variable display start information. The information is transmitted to the display control means (production control device 300) after the information about the game variation time, and the display control means receives a predetermined stop time when the stop extension information is not received. When the stop extension information is received, the stop time corresponding to the stop extension information is set.

[Variation time management processing]
Next, details of the fluctuation time management process (step D95) in the above-described fluctuation process will be described. As shown in FIG. 102, in the variable time management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable timer is 0 (step D111). If the value of the variation timer is not 0 (step D111; N), the variation timer is updated by −1 (step D114), and the variation time management process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the variation timer is 0 (step D111; Y), it is determined whether the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game has been stopped (step D112). N) stops the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game, displays the result mode (step D113), and determines whether the value of the stop time timer is 0 (step D115). Further, when the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game is stopped (step D112; Y), it is determined whether the value of the stop time timer is 0 (step D115).

  If the value of the stop time timer is not 0 (step D115; N), the stop time timer is updated by -1 (step D117), and the variable time management process is terminated. If the value of the stop time timer is 0 (step D115; Y), the decorative special figure variation display game is terminated (step D116), and the variation time management process is terminated.

  As a result of this processing, the effect control device 300 changes the decoration special figure variation display game without depending on the symbol stop command from the game control device 100 with the end of the variation time of the special figure variation display game controlled by the game control device 100. The display is stopped and the result mode is displayed. This eliminates the need for the game control device 100 to transmit a symbol stop command that informs the end of the variation time of the special-figure display game, thereby reducing the control load on the game control device 100.

  From the above, control of the game is comprehensively controlled, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the variable display start commanding the start of execution of the variable display game for displaying the result mode after the plurality of symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display device Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting information, and display control means (effect control device 300) for executing a variable display game based on the variable display start information. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player in connection with the special result mode, the game control means uses at least a variation time for identifying a variation time in the variation display game as the variation display start information. The information is transmitted to the display control means, and the display control means starts the variable display game by receiving the variable display start information, and is specified by the variable time information. Stop the variable display based on've been variable display over the movement time becomes to have so as to display the results manner.

[2nd main processing]
The video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 of the effect control device 300 performs 2nd main processing shown in FIG. In the 2nd main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. As a process at the start of the program, first, a CPU initialization process for initializing the CPU (step D121) is performed, the RAM is cleared to 0 (step D122), and an initial value of the RAM is set (step D123). Next, VDP initialization processing for initializing VDP 313 (step D124) is performed, and various interrupts are permitted (step D125). Next, initialization processing of various control processes (step D126) is performed, and screen drawing is permitted (step D127).

  In the 2nd main process, a loop process is performed as a main loop process. In this loop processing, first, the system cycle wait flag is cleared (step D128), and it is determined whether or not the system cycle wait flag is 1 (step D129). The system cycle is a cycle for switching between two buffers for temporarily storing image data. When the switching is enabled, the system cycle flag is “1”. Until the system cycle wait flag becomes 1, the determination of whether or not the system cycle wait flag is 1 is repeated (step D129). When the system cycle wait flag becomes 1 (step D129; Y), WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step D130).

  Next, a received command check process (step D131) is performed. In this received command check process, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 has been correctly received. If the command has been correctly received, the command is determined and the 2nd scene control process is performed. Process to classify commands for Next, background processing (step D132) for setting the background is performed. In this background process, a process of displaying a background according to the gaming state (whether there is a probability state or a waiting state for customers), the gaming mode, the production mode, the reach scene, and the like is performed.

  Thereafter, a reel control / display process (step D133), which is a control process related to a change in the identification information in the decoration special figure change display game, is performed. In this embodiment, since the variable display is performed on the main display device 41, processing relating to the display of the identification information is performed. When the variable display game is displayed by the rotating reel, the reel operation is controlled here. Then, a hold display process for setting the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the main display device 41 or the sub display device 600 in conjunction with the display of the special figure 1 hold display and the special figure 2 hold display (step D134). )I do. In the hold display processing, processing related to display of a pre-effect (pre-reading effect) that changes the display mode of the decoration special-purpose start memory display is also performed based on the pre-effect information stored in the start storage area.

  Next, a customer waiting demo process (step D135) related to the display of the customer waiting demo is performed. In this customer waiting demonstration process, processing relating to setting of a customer waiting screen for displaying characters, videos, etc., processing relating to setting of notification display to be displayed on the customer waiting screen, and the like are performed. Then, based on the received command, scene control / display processing (step D136) for determining display contents is performed. In this scene control / display process, a notice character and the like are set and display priority is set, and an effect image corresponding to the progress of the special figure variation display game is displayed on the main display device 41 and the sub display device 600. . Further, the ROM data is transferred to the buffer set in the RAM, the display system process (step D137) for performing the actual display process is performed, and the process returns to the process for clearing the system cycle waiting flag (step D128).

[V blank interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank interrupt process will be described. The V blank interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic V blank interrupt signal, for example, every 16 ms to the 2nd CPU. As shown in FIG. 104, in the V blank interrupt process, first, the value of the frame counter is updated by +1 (step D141), and it is determined whether the value of the frame counter is equal to or greater than a specified value (step D142). Here, when the value of the frame counter is less than the specified value (step D142; N), the V blank interrupt processing is terminated, and when the value of the frame counter is equal to or greater than the specified value (step D142; Y), the system period waits. It is determined whether or not the flag is “0” (step D143).

  If the system cycle wait flag is not “0” (step D143; N), the V blank interrupt process is terminated. If the system cycle wait flag is “0” (step D143; Y), VDP draws. Is determined (step D144). If the VDP has not completed drawing (step D144; N), the V blank interrupt processing is terminated. If the VDP has completed drawing (step D144; Y), the display frame buffer is switched (step D145). The VDP is instructed to start drawing in the switched display frame buffer (step D146).

  Next, a VDP drawing flag indicating that VDP has started drawing is set (step D147), and the frame counter is cleared to 0 (step D148). Thereafter, “1” is set to the system cycle wait flag (step D 149), and the V blank interrupt processing is terminated.

  From the above, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for performing various controls based on the control information from the game control means (game control device 100). Further, the effect control device 300 serves as a display control means for controlling display on a plurality of display devices (main display device 41, sub display device 600).

  Next, the operation and display of the sub display device 600 provided in the center case 40 will be described. The arrangement of the sub display device 600 can be changed according to the gaming state. The position at which the sub display device 600 is disposed is set in the vicinity of a portion that the player should pay attention to in the gaming state, and can notify the player where to pay attention and The user can also visually recognize the display on the sub display device 600 while paying attention to the portion.

  When it is not in any of the short-time state, the special game state, and the reach state, it is arranged at the arrangement position B. In this state, the game ball is won at the start winning opening 36 and the game according to the first special figure variation display game is executed, so that it is arranged at the arrangement position B near the start winning opening 36. Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), a display for prompting a winning at the start winning opening 36 is performed. In addition, various information related to the game can be displayed.

  Further, even in the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, the game is placed at the arrangement position B in the vicinity of the first special variable winning device 38. In this case, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), information related to the special game state is displayed. For example, the number of rounds, the number of counts, and the total number of payout balls are displayed. The information on the special gaming state includes information on one special gaming state, as well as information on a special gaming state that occurs when, for example, it is not a short-time state, and a special gaming state that occurs without interruption after the completion of the special gaming state. Information that summarizes

  Furthermore, in the case of informing the presence of a start memory that gives a special result of opening the first special variable winning device 38 as a pre-reading advance notice for notifying information related to the special figure variation display game based on the stored start memory, FIG. As shown in (c), a notice may be given at the arrangement position B.

  When it is in the reach state, it is arranged at the arrangement position A. In this state, as shown in FIG. 106, the display overlaps in front of the main display device 41, and the sub display device 600 displays information on the reach state such as the reach state effect display and the reliability resulting in a special result. In addition, the identification information may be displayed in a variable manner. As a result, it is possible to enhance the production effect by the synergistic effect of the display of the special display variation display game displayed on the main display device 41 and the display of the sub display device 600, and to improve the fun of the game.

  In the case of a special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, it is arranged at the arrangement position C in the vicinity of the second special variable winning device 39. In this case, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), information on the special game state is displayed, and for example, the number of rounds, the number of counts, and the total number of payout balls are displayed. The information on the special gaming state includes information on one special gaming state, as well as information on a special gaming state that occurs when, for example, it is not a short-time state, and a special gaming state that occurs without interruption after the completion of the special gaming state. Information that summarizes Furthermore, in the case of informing the presence of a start memory that gives a special result of opening the second special variable winning device 39, as a pre-reading advance notice for notifying information related to the special figure change display game based on the stored start memory, FIG. As shown in (b), a notice may be given at the arrangement position C.

  In the short-time state, the game ball is won by the normal variation winning device 37 and the game according to the second special figure variation display game is executed. Arranged. Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), a display prompting the player to win the normal variation winning device 37 is performed. In addition, various information related to the game can be displayed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), it is possible to display the character on the sub display device 600 and perform an effect in which the character operates in response to winning in the normal variation winning device 37. In addition to notifying the winning by the action of the character, a pre-reading notice about the start memory generated by the winning may be performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), the decoration special figure start memory display 90 corresponding to the second start memory generated based on the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 may be performed on the sub display device 600. . Further, a pre-reading notice may be performed on the decorative special figure start memory display 90. Here, the pre-reading notice is performed by changing the display mode.

  Thus, by providing the sub display device 600 that can move according to the gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest. In particular, it is possible to instruct the player which winning device to aim, and the sub display device 600 can be arranged at a position facing the player's line of sight to make the displayed contents easier to see, improving the fun of the game can do. For example, during normal times when the game is not in a special game state, the player pays attention to whether or not a game ball will win a start opening (start winning opening 36 or normal variation winning apparatus 37). Therefore, by disposing the sub display device 600 in the vicinity of the start port, it becomes possible to efficiently transmit information to be transmitted to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Sub-display device movement processing]
In order to control the operation of the sub display device 600 as described above, the sub display device movement process shown in FIG. 109 is performed in the motor / SOL control process (step D14) in the first main process (see FIG. 97). In this sub display device movement process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has been changed (step D151). The change of the gaming state here is a change to a gaming state that does not correspond to the current position of the sub display device.

  If there is no change in the gaming state (step D151; N), it is determined whether there is a new start-up memory (step D153). If there is a change in the gaming state (step D151; Y), a process of moving the sub display device 600 to a position corresponding to the gaming state is performed (step D152), and it is determined whether there is a new start memory (step D152). D153).

  If there is a new start-up memory (step D153; Y), a notice execution determination random number for determining whether to execute the notice is acquired (step D154). Then, based on the prefetch information received from the game control apparatus 100, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory is a big hit (step D155). When the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory is a big hit (step D155; Y), a winning judgment value is set as a judgment value for judging the notice execution judgment random number (step D156), and the notice is given. The execution determination random number and the hit determination value are compared to determine whether to perform a pre-reading notice with the operation of the sub display device 600 (step D158). If the special-figure display game based on the start memory is not a big hit (step D155; N), a determination value for losing is set as a determination value for determining a random number for determining the notice execution (step D157), It is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice accompanying the operation of the sub display device 600 is executed by comparing the notice execution determination random number and the winning determination value (step D158).

  If the pre-reading advance notice accompanying the operation of the sub display device 600 is not executed (step D158; N), that is, if the notice execution determination random number does not match the set determination value, the sub display device moving process is terminated. Further, when the pre-reading advance notice accompanied with the operation of the sub display device 600 is executed (step D158; Y), that is, when the notice execution determination random number coincides with the set determination value, the vicinity of the corresponding special variable prize winning device is approached. The sub display device 600 is moved (step D159), and the sub display device movement process is terminated. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an operation control means that can operate an operable display device in accordance with the gaming state. Thus, since the production control device 300 performs display control and operation control of a plurality of display devices, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced, and a plurality of display devices can be controlled by a single control device, so that display contents can be displayed. Control such as linking is facilitated.

  It should be noted that the prefetching advance notice performed by changing the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display 90 and the prefetching advance notice accompanying the operation of the sub display device 600 may be set separately, or the two may be set in association with each other. You may make it do. Further, the sub display device 600 may be visible at all times, or may be visible only in a state where the sub display device 600 is in a specific arrangement position. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start-up memory is a big hit (step D155; Y), the pre-reading notice may be executed without fail. In addition, when the result of the special figure change display game based on the start-up memory is not a big hit (step D155; N), the pre-reading notice may not be executed. Further, the game control device 100 may transmit the jackpot random value acquired for the start memory to the effect control device 300, make a prefetch determination in the effect control device 300, and make a prefetch notice based on the result. .

  FIG. 110 shows an example of an effect using the main display device 41 and the sub display device 600. In this case, the time is short and the sub display device 600 is arranged at the arrangement position D. In the main display device 41, a decoration special-figure display game in which the identification information is displayed in a variable manner is performed. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), the teammate character is displayed on the sub display device 600 when the reach state is reached.

  If it is normal reach, then the result mode of the deviation is displayed and the special figure variation display game is ended. Further, when developing to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the display of the decoration special figure variation display game moves to the sub display device 600, and the teammate character moves to the main display device 41. Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (c), when the main display device 41 produces an effect of fighting an enemy character and the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 110 (d). A friendly character wins. In the case of a loss, the enemy character wins.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (e), the display of the decoration special figure variation display game moves to the main display device 41, and the teammate character moves to the sub display device 600. Is displayed. In this way, by performing an unprecedented presentation in which a specific display moves between a plurality of display devices, it is possible to improve the interest more than merely performing presentation display on each display device. . Further, the effect most noticed by the player can be displayed on the display device that is easy for the player to see, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, there are a plurality of types of characters in the teammate character, and one of the characters is selected depending on the position where the sub display device 600 is arranged. This selection is performed in the changing effect pattern setting process (step D84) in the changing process (see FIG. 100). Thereby, the character can be selected from various characters, and in particular, the character associated with the position of the sub display device 600 can be selected, so that the interest can be improved.

  Further, based on the player operating the effect button 25 during a predetermined selection period, a process for changing the type of teammate character is performed in the effect button input process (step D6). Thereby, it becomes possible to select a character from various things according to the player's intention, and it is possible to improve the interest. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a display selection unit that selects a specific display (character) from a plurality of types of display.

  In addition, a specific display may be moved between the main display device 41 and the sub display device 600 in accordance with the player's operation. For example, the display button 25 may be moved to another display device based on the operation of the effect button 25. When the lever is provided, an infrared sensor capable of detecting the movement of the player's hand is provided in the operation direction of the lever. If a touch panel is provided in the direction in which the player's hand moves, a specific display may be moved to a display device that exists in the direction of the flick operation.

  Based on the above, a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The gaming machine includes a plurality of display devices (main display device 41, sub display device 600) capable of displaying information related to the game, and at least one display device (sub display device 600) is configured to be operable. An operation control means (effect control device 300) capable of operating the display device in accordance with the gaming state is provided. Therefore, interest can be improved by the operation of the display device.

  Here, the gaming machines include all gaming machines that use gaming balls such as pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, slot machines that use medals, slot machines that use gaming balls, etc. All slot machines are included. The display device includes a display device using liquid crystal, LED, EL, or the like, and a mechanical display device such as a reel or a drum. The same applies to the following modifications.

  In addition, a plurality of winning devices (a general start gate 34, a general winning port 35, a starting winning port 36, a normal variable winning device 37, and special variable winning devices 38, 39) capable of winning a ball flowing down the game area 32 are provided. The action control means (production control device 300) moves the display device (sub display device 600) in the vicinity of the associated winning device according to the gaming state.

  Here, any winning device may be used, such as a starting port that triggers the execution of the variable display game, a normal variable winning device that can be converted into a difficult state and an easy state at the starting port, and a special game. In addition to the special variable prize device that is released in the state, there are general prize holes where only prize balls can be paid out by winning, prize holes that trigger the opening of special variable prize devices, gates that detect the passage of game balls, etc. It is done. The same applies to the following modifications.

  Therefore, it is possible to instruct which player the winning device is aimed at, or to arrange a display device at a position facing the player's line of sight to make the display content easier to see, and to improve the interest of the game Can do.

  Further, the predetermined condition can be established when a game ball wins at a start opening (start winning opening 36, normal variation winning apparatus 37) constituting a winning apparatus, and the operation control means (production control apparatus 300) When it is not in a state, an operable display device (sub display device 600) is arranged in the vicinity of the start port.

  Therefore, during normal times when the game is not in the special game state, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball is won at the starting port. Therefore, by disposing the display device in the vicinity of the start port, it becomes possible to efficiently transmit information to be transmitted to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The display device includes a first display device (main display device 41) that is inoperable and displays a variable display game, and an operable second display device (sub display device 600). The operation control means (the effect control device 300) moves the second display device before the first display device when the reach state occurs in the variable display game.

  Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced by the synergistic effect by the display of the variable display game displayed on the first display device and the second display device, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  The game control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game and the effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) for performing various controls based on the control information from the game control means The control means performs display control of a plurality of display devices (main display device 41, sub display device 600) and includes operation control means (effect control device 300).

  Therefore, the burden on the game control means can be reduced, and a plurality of display devices are controlled by one control device, so that control such as linking display contents becomes easy.

  Also, in a gaming machine that executes a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result , A plurality of display devices (main display device 41, sub display device 600) capable of displaying information related to the game, and a plurality of variable winning devices capable of converting the game ball into a state where it is difficult or impossible to win and a state where it is easy to win (Ordinary variable winning device 37, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39), and at least one display device (sub display device 600) is configured to be operable, depending on the gaming state Therefore, it is provided with operation control means (effect control device 300) capable of moving the display device in the vicinity of the related variable winning device.

  Here, the variable winning device only needs to be able to convert the game ball into a state where it is difficult or impossible to win and a state where it is easy to win, and an ordinary variable winning device which is a starting point that triggers the execution of the variable display game. A special variable winning device that is opened in a special gaming state. The same applies to the following modifications.

  Therefore, interest can be improved by the operation of the display device. In addition, it is possible to inform the player which variable winning device should be aimed at launching the game ball.

  The variable winning device includes a special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) that is converted into an easy-to-win state in a special gaming state, and operation control means (effect control device). 300), when the special gaming state occurs, the display device (sub display device 600) is moved to the vicinity of the special variable winning device.

  Therefore, it is possible to inform the player which variable winning device should be aimed at firing the game ball.

  The variable winning device includes a normal variable winning device 37 in which a predetermined condition is established by winning, and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which it is easier to win the normal variable winning device 37 than the normal gaming state. The game state control means (game control device 100) for setting any of the game states is provided, and the operation control means (production control device 300) displays the display device (sub display device 600) when a specific game state occurs. It moves to the vicinity of the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

  Therefore, it is possible to inform the player which variable winning device should be aimed at firing the game ball.

  Also, in a gaming machine that executes a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result A plurality of display devices (main display device 41, sub display device 600) capable of displaying information related to the game, and display control means (effect control device 300) for controlling display on the plurality of display devices, and display control The means can be displayed such that a specific display moves between a plurality of display devices.

  Therefore, an unprecedented effect that a specific display moves between a plurality of display devices can be performed, and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, the display control means (production control device 300) includes display selection means for selecting a specific display from a plurality of types of display. Therefore, the specific display can be selected from various ones, and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, a detection means (production button switch 25a) capable of detecting the player's operation or action is provided, and the display selection means (production control device 300) can select a specific display based on the detection result of the detection means. Therefore, a specific display can be selected from various ones according to the player's intention, and the interest can be improved.

  Here, examples of the detection means include those that detect player operations such as buttons, levers, and touch panels, and those that detect player operations such as infrared sensors. The same applies to the following modifications.

  In addition, at least one display device (sub display device 600) is configured to be operable, and includes operation control means (effect control device 300) capable of operating the operable display device, and display selection means (effect control). The device 300) can select a specific display based on the position to which the display device has moved.

  Therefore, since a specific display associated with the position of the display device can be selected, it is possible to improve the interest.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the sub display device 600 is arranged so as to face the back surface of the stage unit 48.

  As shown in FIGS. 111 (a) and 111 (b), the stage portion 48 is made of a transparent member, and the sub display device 600 is movably disposed below the stage portion 48. Thus, the sub display device 600 can be visually recognized. The sub display device 600 can be converted into an arrangement position E located at the left end in the movement range and an arrangement position F located at the right end in the movement range. Note that any configuration may be used for operating the sub display device 600, and the mechanisms described in the above-described embodiments can be used. By adopting such an arrangement, the sub display device 600 is arranged substantially horizontally, so that it can be easily seen by a player walking along the aisle, and the appeal can be enhanced. In addition, when the game ball is rolling on the stage portion 48, the decoration of the stage portion 48 can be improved.

  When the state is neither the short-time state nor the special game state, or in the special game state in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened, the arrangement position E in the vicinity of the start winning port 36 or the first special variation winning device 38. Arranged. In this position, in addition to the display as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the effect display that the game ball flows down to the start winning opening 36 and the first special variable winning device 38 as shown in FIG. 112 (a). Can also be done. A sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided in the warp channel 47 for guiding the game ball to the stage unit 48, and when the game ball is detected by the sensor, a display as shown in FIG. 112 (a) is performed. May be.

  Further, in the short-time state or the special game state in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened, the game is placed at the arrangement position F in the vicinity of the normal variation winning device 37 or the second special variation winning device 39. In this position, in addition to the display as shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the display of the gaming state as shown in FIG. 112 (b) can also be performed.

  It should be noted that the arrangement position of the sub display device 600 may be divided more finely so as to correspond to each gaming state. Further, in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a configuration in which there are two sub display devices 600 that can be operated may be employed.

  In view of the above, the inclined portion (stage portion 48) that is inclined horizontally or forward is formed, the inclined portion is made of a transparent member, and the display device (sub display device 600) is provided below the inclined portion. Is configured to be movable. The inclined portion is not limited to the stage portion 48 described above, and may be an inclined portion provided at a location where the game ball does not roll in the game area 32. Further, it may be an inclined portion formed on the front frame 12 outside the game area 32. Moreover, the inclination part which arrange | positions the medal insertion part etc. in a slot machine, and the inclination part provided in the periphery of the lower plate which stores the payout medal may be sufficient. The same applies to each modification relating to the inclined portion thereafter.

  Moreover, the arrangement | positioning aspect of the sub display apparatus 600 is not restricted to the inclination part which goes down horizontally or ahead, What is necessary is just to arrange | position so that it may not be parallel to the vertical surface along the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of depth that is particularly scarce in gaming machines, and it is possible to further enhance interest. For example, the sub display device 600 is disposed on the inner peripheral surface of the concave chamber-shaped center case 40, a concave chamber-shaped space is formed above the reel in the slot machine, and the main display device 41 is disposed at the back. It is also conceivable to dispose the sub display device 600 on the inner peripheral surface of the concave chamber.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, a sub display device 600 that can move up and down is provided on the stage portion 48.

  The sub display device 600 protrudes from the stage portion 48 as shown in FIG. 113A and overlaps the front of the main display device 41, and is embedded in the stage portion 48 as shown in FIG. The display device 41 can be converted into a state of being retracted from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (c), the stage portion 48 is formed with a passage opening 48a through which the sub display device 600 can pass, through which the sub display device 600 appears and disappears. In a state where the sub display device 600 is buried in the stage unit 48, the upper surface of the stage unit 48 and the upper surface of the sub display device 600 coincide with each other, and the upper surface of the sub display device 600 forms a part of the stage unit 48. Yes. It should be noted that the gap between the periphery of the passage opening 48a and the sub display device 600 is sufficiently narrow so that the game ball does not drop or stay on the gap.

  Various operation modes of the sub display device 600 are conceivable. For example, the sub display device 600 is normally buried in the stage unit 48 as shown in FIG. In the special gaming state, the state is converted into a state protruding to the stage portion 48 as shown in FIG.

  In view of the above, a state in which the horizontal or forward inclined part (stage part 48) and a display device (sub display device 600) movable up and down are provided, and the display device protrudes on the inclined part, It can be converted into a state buried in the inclined portion.

  It should be noted that the shape of the sub display device 600 may be configured so that the sub display device 600 that protrudes from the stage portion 48 is likely to flow into the start winning opening 36 by contact. Further, the sub display device 600 may be configured such that the game ball does not come into contact with the sub display device 600 so that the rolling of the game ball is not affected. Further, the stage unit 48 may be made of a transparent material so that the image of the sub display device 600 embedded in the stage unit 48 can be visually recognized. Further, the game board 30 may be provided with a window part that allows the image of the sub display device 600 buried in the stage part 48 to be visually recognized from the front, or the game board 30 itself is made of a transparent material and is provided on the stage part 48. The image of the sub display device 600 that has been buried may be visible from the front. Further, the sub display device 600 may be attached to the stage portion 48 so as to be rotatable so as to be convertible between a horizontal state and a standing state.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, a sub display device 600 that can move up and down is provided in front of the main display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the sub display device 600 is supported by the support portion 602 and is disposed so as to overlap the front of the main display device 41. The support portion 602 can be moved back and forth by a drive mechanism, and the sub display device 600 can be moved back and forth by moving the support portion 602 back and forth. The support portion 602 is provided with a guide shaft 603, and the guide shaft 603 is guided by the guide rail 604 so that the sub display device 600 also moves up and down in accordance with the back and forth movement. ing. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), it is possible to move up while moving backward, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), or move down while moving forward.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), if the guide rail 604 is configured to meander to the left and right, the sub display device 600 can be moved to the left and right in accordance with the back and forth movement. As a result, an operation of moving to the right while moving backward as shown in FIG. 115 (b), an operation of moving to the left while moving backward as shown in FIG. 115 (c), and the like are possible. .

  Note that the configuration of FIG. 114 and the configuration of FIG. In addition, a mechanism for moving the support portion in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction by the driving force of a separate driving source is provided regardless of the guide rail 604 so that the sub display device 600 can be moved in any direction at any timing. Also good. Further, it is preferable that the game ball does not flow into the range in which the sub display device 600 operates, but the game ball may be allowed to flow in and contact with the sub display device 600.

  Various operation modes of the sub display device 600 are conceivable. For example, a front and rear position corresponding to the gaming state is set, and the sub display device 600 moves to a corresponding position when the gaming state is changed. , Move when performing pre-reading notices, or move during the customer waiting demonstration. In addition, it is usually in a state of being lowered to a position retracted from the front of the main display device 41, and may be overlapped in front of the main display device 41 when performing an effect, or from the normal time to the front of the main display device 41. An effect display may be performed at the overlapping position.

  In this manner, the sub display device 600 operates in the front-rear direction, so that it is possible to give a feeling of depth that is not sufficient for a gaming machine, and to further improve the interest. In addition, by being able to move up and down and / or left and right along with the operation in the front-rear direction, it is possible to improve the interest by the combined operation of the sub display device 600.

  Based on the above, a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The gaming machine includes a plurality of display devices (main display device 41, sub display device 600) capable of displaying information related to the game, and at least one display device (sub display device 600) is configured to be operable in the front-rear direction. An operation control means (production control device 300) capable of operating an operable display device in accordance with the gaming state is provided. Therefore, interest can be improved by the operation of the display device.

  Further, the display device (sub display device 600) can be operated in the up and down direction and / or the left and right direction, and the operation control means (production control device 300) can move up and down and / or when the display device is operated in the front and back direction. It can also be operated in the left-right direction. Therefore, the interest can be improved by the combined operation of the display device.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, a sub display device 600 that is movable up and down and rotatable is provided in front of the main display device 41.

  The sub display device 600 is buried in the stage portion 48 as shown in FIG. 116 (a) and retracted from the front of the main display device 41, and the sub display device 600 projects to the stage portion 48 as shown in FIG. 116 (b). It can be converted into a state where it overlaps the front of the display device 41. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), it can rotate around a support portion 602 along the vertical direction. In addition, although it is comprised so that a game ball may not flow into the circumference | surroundings of the sub display apparatus 600, you may comprise so that inflow is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), the stage portion 48 is formed with a passage opening 48a through which the sub display device 600 can pass, through which the sub display device 600 appears and disappears. In a state where the sub display device 600 is buried in the stage unit 48, the upper surface of the stage unit 48 and the upper surface of the sub display device 600 coincide with each other.

  FIG. 117 shows an example of such an effect produced by the sub display device 600. The sub display device 600 is normally buried in the stage portion 48 and retracted from the front of the main display device 41. When a reach state occurs as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the sub display device 600 is shown in FIG. 117 (b). As shown, the sub-display device 600 is raised so as to overlap the middle fluctuation display area. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the sub display device 600 performs the variable display in the medium variable display area.

  After that, when the speed of the variable display decreases and a few frames before the identification information forming the reach state, the variable display is performed to change the identification information one frame at a time in a visible state. In this variable display, the sub display device 600 is rotated in a state where the identification information is displayed as shown in FIG.

  117 (e), the identification information is not changed when the display surface is visible from the front, but the identification information is changed when the display surface is vertical as shown in FIG. 117 (f). The identification information changed as shown in FIG. 117 (g) is made visible. By doing in this way, the operation of the sub display device 600 can produce the display of the identification information, and the interest can be improved. Further, since the player cannot see the moment of symbol replacement, the change of the identification information can be displayed smoothly without a sense of incongruity. Although the orientation of the display surface is detected by the sub display switch 601, it may be detected that the display surface is in a state along the front-rear direction in addition to the state along the left-right direction.

  Further, in combination with the above-described third modified example, it is also possible to have a configuration that can rotate around the support portion 602 while allowing up / down / left / right movement accompanying back-and-forth movement. Moreover, although the support part 602 was made to follow a perpendicular direction, it is not restricted to this, What kind of direction may be sufficient. However, if the support portion 602 is set along a vertical plane along the left-right direction, the display surface becomes vertical as shown in FIG. The effect as shown in FIG. 117 can be performed.

  In addition, display surfaces may be provided on both surfaces of the sub display device 600. When the display surface is provided only on one surface of the sub-display device 600, the symbols may be replaced in a period from when the display surface becomes vertical to the rear and the display surface becomes vertical again. When the display surface is provided on both surfaces of the sub display device 600, the symbols are replaced only while the display surface is vertical.

  From the above, the display of the plurality of display devices (main display device 41, sub display device 600) is controlled, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) including the operation control means (effect control device 300) is provided. The display device (sub-display device 600) can rotate, the operation control means controls the rotation of the display device, and the effect control means can display identification information on the operable display device. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest by causing the operation of the display device to display the identification information.

  In addition, the display device (sub display device 600) can rotate around an axis (support 602) along a vertical plane along the left-right direction, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) can control the operation. When the identification information is variably displayed on the display device (sub display device 600) rotated by the means, it is possible to execute an effect in which the display surface is changed in a state where the display surface is along the front-rear direction. Become.

  Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest by causing the operation of the display device to display the identification information. Further, since the player cannot see the moment of symbol replacement, the change of the identification information can be displayed smoothly without a sense of incongruity.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The gaming machine of this modification includes a half mirror 620 that can reflect a part of incident light and transmit a part thereof so that the light from the sub display device 600 can be reflected forward.

  As shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B, the stage portion 48 is made of a transparent member, and a sub display device 600 is disposed below the stage portion 48, and the sub-display device 600 is interposed via the stage portion 48. The display device 600 is visible. As shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B, the sub display device 600 is pivotally supported by a rotation shaft 605 extending in the left-right direction, and is driven by a drive source controlled by the effect control device 300. Conversion to a horizontal state and an inclined state as shown in FIGS. 118 (c) and 118 (d) is possible.

  In this way, by arranging the sub display device 600 substantially horizontally, it is possible to improve the interest by arranging the display device which has not been heretofore, and it is possible to give a sense of depth that is particularly scarce in gaming machines. Can be improved. Further, since the sub display device 600 is arranged below the main display device 41, it is easy for the player to visually recognize both the main display device 41 and the sub display device 600 at the same time, and the effect of the effect of cooperation between the two display devices is achieved. Can be increased.

  Also, between the sub display device 600 and the main display device 41, the main display device is buried in the stage portion 48 as shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B by a drive source controlled by the effect control device 300. A half mirror 620 that can be converted into a state of being retracted from the front of 41 and a state of protruding to the stage portion 48 and overlapping the front of the main display device 41 as shown in FIGS. 118 (c) and 118 (d) is provided. ing.

  The half mirror 620 can reflect a part of incident light and transmit a part of the incident light. In the state shown in FIGS. 118 (c) and 118 (d), the light from the main display device 41. Can be transmitted forward, and part of the light from the sub display device 600 can be reflected forward. Further, by rotating the sub display device 600 so that the display surface faces the half mirror 620, the image of the sub display device 600 can be reflected by the half mirror 620 and can be easily seen by the player. By providing such a half mirror 620, it is possible to provide a novel and unprecedented effect using the sub display device 600 provided below the stage unit 48. In addition, the decorativeness is further enhanced by combining with the main display device 41 located behind the half mirror 620.

  FIG. 119 shows an example of a display mode on the main display device 41 when the half mirror 620 is projected forward of the main display device 41. As shown in FIGS. 119 (a) and 119 (b), the entire area facing the half mirror 620 is darkly displayed so that the image of the sub display device 600 appears on the entire surface of the half mirror 620. It can appear as if the display device 600 is positioned in front of the main display device 41.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c) and 119 (d), only a predetermined area (here, the area facing the character) is darkly displayed in accordance with the image of the sub display device 600, so that the predetermined area is displayed. The image of the sub display device 600 is clearly shown in the corresponding portion, and the image of the main display device 41 is seen through in the other portions. Thereby, the image of a predetermined area can be shown three-dimensionally. Thus, the visual effect can be enhanced by linking the images on the main display device 41 and the sub display device 600.

  FIG. 120 shows an example of the effect. As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the state where the half mirror 620 is buried in the stage portion 48 and retracted from the front of the main display device 41, the decoration special figure change display game or the like is displayed using the entire surface of the main display device 41. The decorative special figure start memory display 90 is displayed. Here, a decorative special figure start memory display 90 corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the left side from the center of the main display device 41, and a special display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the right side from the center of the main display device 41. The figure start memory display 90 is displayed, showing a state where there are four start memories.

  In addition, the effect display is also performed on the sub display device 600 arranged substantially horizontally, and the player can directly view the image on the sub display device 600. In addition, you may rotate so that the display surface of the sub display apparatus 600 may face a player. By disposing the sub display device 600 so as to be horizontal or inclined toward the player side, the player can easily view the sub display device 600.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the state where the half mirror 620 protrudes to the stage portion 48 and overlaps the front of the main display device 41, the main display device 41 has a decorative special view other than the region facing the half mirror 620. The variable display game and the decorative special figure start memory display 90 are displayed. Here, a decorative special figure start memory display 90 corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the left side of the area overlapping with the half mirror 620, and a decorative special figure start corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the right side of the area overlapping with the half mirror 620. A memory display 90 is displayed. In addition, an effect image using the half mirror 620 is displayed in a region facing the half mirror 620.

  Here, since the effect of reflecting the image of the sub display device 600 is not performed, the sub display device 600 remains in a substantially horizontal state. Further, in the area facing the half mirror 620 of the main display device 41, an image that is transmitted through the half mirror 620 and made visible to the player is displayed. The display is visible through the half mirror 620. Here, information about the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed.

  120C, the half mirror 620 protrudes to the stage portion 48 and overlaps the front of the main display device 41, and the sub display device 600 is inclined toward the half mirror 620. In a region facing the half mirror 620, display as shown in FIG. 119 is performed. As a result, the player can visually recognize the image of the sub display device 600 reflected by the half mirror 620. Here, the information displayed on the sub display device 600 regarding the special figure variation display game being executed is visible through the half mirror 620. By setting it as such a production | generation aspect, the novel production | presentation of showing the image reflected on the half mirror 620 and the transmitted image is attained.

  The sub display device 600 may not be directly visible to the player, and the image of the sub display device 600 may be visible only through the half mirror 620. In addition, the arrangement positions of the sub display device 600 and the half mirror 620 are not limited to those described above, and any arrangement is possible as long as the image of the sub display device 600 is reflected by the half mirror 620 and can be visually recognized by the player. good. Further, the arrangement mode of the sub display device 600 is not limited to the arrangement in which the display surface is arranged substantially horizontally with the display surface facing upward. If the display surface of the sub display device 600 is arranged so as not to be parallel to the display surface of the main display device 41 arranged along the vertical plane along the left-right direction, it becomes a three-dimensional arrangement and gives a sense of depth. Can do.

  In addition, an illuminance sensor that detects the brightness around the gaming machine is provided, and a luminance adjustment unit that adjusts the luminance of the sub display device 600 and the region of the main display device 41 facing the half mirror 620 based on the detection result of the illuminance sensor. (For example, the production control device 300) may be provided. By providing such brightness adjusting means, an image seen by the player via the half mirror 620 can be adjusted to an appropriate one. In addition to automatic control, the store clerk or player of the game store may be able to make adjustments.

  Based on the above, a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The gaming machine includes a plurality of display devices (main display device 41, sub display device 600) capable of displaying information related to the game, and the display surface of at least one display device (sub display device 600) extends in the left-right direction. It will be arranged so as not to be parallel to the vertical plane. Therefore, the interest can be improved by the arrangement of the display device which is not conventional.

  In addition, the display device includes a first display device (main display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game, and the second display device (sub display device 600) is placed at a position below the first display device. Is inclined and arranged so as to be lowered horizontally or toward the player side.

  Therefore, the interest can be improved by the arrangement of the display device which is not conventional. Further, since the second display device is arranged below the first display device, it is easy for the player to visually recognize both the first display device and the second display device at the same time, and the two display devices cooperate. The effect of the production can be enhanced. Further, since the second display device is disposed horizontally or inclined so as to be lowered toward the player side, the player can easily see the second display device.

  The second display device (sub display device 600) can be rotated and the direction of the display surface can be changed, and operation control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the rotation operation of the second display device. ) And a half mirror 620 capable of reflecting a part of incident light and transmitting a part thereof in front of the first display device (main display device 41) is light from the second display device. Is provided so that it can be reflected forward.

  Therefore, the interest can be improved by the arrangement of the display device which is not conventional. In addition, it is possible to produce a novel effect that shows an image reflected on the mirror.

  Further, the half mirror 620 can be converted into a first state located in front of the first display device (main display device 41) and a second state retracted from the front of the first display device. The means converts the half mirror 620 to the first state based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and rotates the second display device so that the display surface faces the half mirror 620.

  Therefore, the interest can be improved by the arrangement of the display device which is not conventional. In addition, it is possible to produce a novel effect that shows an image reflected on the mirror.

[Sixth Modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification is a touch panel type in which the sub display device 600 can detect contact of an object.

  As shown in FIG. 121, the sub display device 600 is provided so as to be exposed on the upper surface of the stage portion 48, and a rolling game ball comes into contact with the display surface. A protective sheet that protects the display surface from the collision of game balls may be provided. The stage portion 48 is inclined toward the front, and the sub display device 600 is also arranged in accordance with this inclination. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of depth that is particularly scarce in gaming machines, and it is possible to further enhance interest. In addition, the player is easy to visually recognize because it is disposed horizontally or inclined so as to descend toward the player side.

  The sub display device 600 is a touch panel that can detect contact of a game ball. Detection information on the touch panel is input to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying a locus at a corresponding position based on the detection information. Thus, when the game ball rolls on the sub display device 600 as shown in FIG. 121 (a), the trajectory is displayed on the sub display device 600 as shown in FIG. 121 (b). By performing such display, the rolling of the game ball in the stage unit 48 can be produced by an unprecedented novel method, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The display on the sub display device 600 is not limited to this. For example, when the flow is flowing toward the start winning opening 36, the trajectory is displayed in a display mode different from the case where it is not. May be. Further, the display mode of the trajectory may be varied according to the flow speed. Further, it is not necessary to display the trajectory, and it is sufficient if the display mode is changed based on the game ball touching the sub display device 600.

  FIG. 122 shows another usage example of the touch panel sub display device 600. Here, instead of the center case 40, in the so-called feather type game machine provided with the variable prize apparatus 80 shown in FIG. 122 (a), an example in which the variable prize apparatus 80 is provided with the touch panel type sub display device 600 is shown. .

  The variable winning device 80 has a winning space 81 that is open on the front side and extends rearward. Further, the front side of the variable prize apparatus 80 is in a state of projecting to the vicinity of the cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30, and inside the variable prize apparatus 80 except when movable members 82 and 82 described later are opened. The game ball is prevented from entering.

  An upper structural member (armor member) 84 is provided above the winning space 81 so as to protrude forward from the surface of the game board 30, and functions as a decorative member on the upper portion of the variable winning device 80. Further, the upper structural member 84 prevents the game ball flowing down from above the variable winning device 80 from entering the winning space 81 and guides the game ball in the left-right direction.

  On the left and right side portions below the upper structural member 84 are provided inlets 83 and 83 that serve as winning ports for the variable winning device 80. The left and right inlets 83 and 83 are provided with inlets 83 and 83, respectively. Movable members 82 and 82 for opening and closing are respectively provided. The movable members 82, 82 have a center of rotation at their lower ends, and can be turned left and right by an open / close solenoid controlled by the game control device 100.

  In a state where the movable members 82 and 82 are substantially vertical, the movable members 82 and 82 block the inlets 83 and 83, and the variable winning device 80 cannot be won. That is, this state is a disadvantageous closed state for the player. On the other hand, in a state where the left and right movable members 82 and 82 are rotated in the direction away from the variable winning device 80 with the lower end portion as the center, the movable members 82 and 82 open in a reverse “C” shape. As a result, the inflow ports 83 and 83 are opened (shown by dotted lines), and a winning to the variable winning device 80 is possible. That is, this state is an open state that is advantageous for the player. The movable members 82 and 82 are normally kept closed (closed state) by the biasing member.

  The movable members 82 and 82 are driven in a predetermined manner by driving an opening / closing solenoid in a start game based on the establishment of the start game generation condition (here, the result mode of the special figure variation display game display game is a predetermined result). It is converted into the open state, and an opportunity for winning a prize to the variable winning device 80 is obtained. Count sensors are provided in the upper part of the winning space 81 and in the vicinity of the inflow ports 83 and 83 at positions where the game balls flowing into the left and right inflow ports 83 and 83 can be detected. Based on the detection signal from the count sensor, the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 80 can be counted. Further, a predetermined number (for example, ten) prize balls are paid out based on this detection signal.

  At the top of the winning space 81, there is provided a shelf 85 that has an inclined surface that descends to the rear, and the game balls that flow in from the inflow ports 83 and 83 fall onto the shelf 85. The shelf 85 is provided with a plurality of obstacle members 86 that change the flow direction of the game ball, and the game balls flow backward while colliding with the obstacle member 86. The rear end of the shelf 85 is separated from the rear wall of the winning space 81 by a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball that has flowed down the shelf 85 falls on the floor 87 below.

  The floor portion 87 is an inclined surface that descends forward, and a touch panel sub-display device 600 is disposed on the floor portion 87. At the front end of the floor portion 87, a special winning opening 88 is formed at the center in the left-right direction, and a normal winning opening 89 is formed on both right and left sides. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the floor 87 flows into either the special winning opening 88 or the normal winning opening 89. The special winning opening 88 is provided with a special winning sensor that serves as a special detecting means for detecting a winning game ball. When the gaming ball is detected by the special winning sensor, the occurrence of a special gaming state, etc. Processing is performed.

  In such a variable winning device 80, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), the floor portion 87 has a central region 87a where there is a high possibility of winning a special winning opening 88 and a possibility of winning a special winning opening 88. Is divided into the low side region 87b, and the display of the sub display device 600 is changed according to the position dropped from the shelf 85. As a display, when a game ball falls in the central area 87a, as shown in FIG. 122 (c), “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed to notify that there is a high possibility of winning the special winning opening 88. When the game ball falls in the side area 87b, “Chance!” Is displayed as shown in FIG. 122 (d) to notify that the possibility of winning the special winning opening 88 is not so high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 123, a part of the floor portion 87 may be configured by the sub display device 600, and the rolling mode of the game ball flowing down as the sub display device 600 rotates may be changed. . As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the sub display device 600 is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft 605 extending in the left-right direction, and is configured to be rotationally driven by a drive source controlled by the game control device 100. To do. When the upper surface of the sub display device 600 is parallel to the floor portion 87, the floor portion 87 has no step and forms a single plane.

  Then, by rotating the sub display device 600 as shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 123 (c), an opening in which the game ball can be dropped is formed in the floor portion 87, and the rolling game ball is placed on the floor portion. 87 can be dropped below. The game ball that has dropped below the floor portion 87 is assumed to have flowed into the normal winning opening 89. Further, it is possible to change the rolling mode by flipping a game ball on the sub display device 600.

  Such a rotation operation is performed based on opening of the movable members 82, 82, detection of a game ball by a count sensor, or the like. For example, in the normal state, the state shown in FIG. 123 (a) is set, and the game ball that flows immediately after the movable members 82 and 82 are opened can flow down the floor 87 in the state shown in FIG. 123 (a). Then, after a predetermined time from the opening of the movable members 82, 82, the sub display device 600 is rotated as shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 123 (c), and the special winning opening 88 is reached when the game ball reaches the floor 87. The ease of inflow is changed. In this case, the display of the trajectory of the game ball that rolls in the state of FIG. 123 (a) is different from the display of the trajectory of the game ball that rolls in the state of FIG. 123 (b) or (c). You may make it show the difference in the ease of inflow to the winning opening 88. FIG. In addition, a rotation aspect and timing can be set arbitrarily. Further, the extending direction of the rotation shaft 605 is not limited to the left-right direction, and may be the front-rear direction or another direction.

  As another use example of the touch panel type sub display device 600, the sub display device 600 is provided not in the game area 32 but in a part that can be touched by the player, and the display contents are changed according to the player's contact mode. You may make it do. The sub display device 600 is preferably provided at a position where the player can operate with the left hand since the operation unit 24 is on the right side. Moreover, if it arrange | positions so that it may become horizontal or descend | fall toward the player side, it will become easy for a player to visually recognize. Further, it may be arranged on the lower surface in the depth direction to the display surface of the display device provided near the reel in the slot machine. 122 and 123 are not limited to so-called feather-type gaming machines, but also to gaming machines equipped with a sorting device that distributes the inflowing game balls to the starting port in a state where winning is easy and difficult. Can be applied in the same way.

  Based on the above, a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The gaming machine includes a display device (sub display device 600) capable of displaying information related to the game, and the display surface of the display device is disposed horizontally or inclined so as to be lowered toward the player side. Become.

  Therefore, the interest can be improved by the arrangement of the display device which is not conventional. In addition, the player is easy to visually recognize because it is disposed horizontally or inclined so as to descend toward the player side.

  The display device (sub-display device 600) includes display control means (production control device 300) for controlling display, and the display device is a touch panel type capable of detecting contact of an object. The display content can be changed according to the contact mode. Therefore, interest can be improved by the display device that can change the display content according to the contact mode of the object.

  Here, the object may be any object such as a human body or a game ball depending on the arrangement position of the display device, and is a touch panel that can detect an object to be detected.

  The second display device includes a first display device (main display device 41) that forms a display device, and a second display device (sub display device 600) that is different from the first display device. A variable display game is displayed.

  Therefore, interest can be enhanced by a plurality of display devices. In addition, since the display device whose display content is changed according to the contact mode of the object and the device that displays the variable display game are separate, the effect by changing the display content without affecting the display of the variable display game It can be performed.

[Seventh Modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The gaming machine of this modification includes an accessory device 650 in front of the sub display device 600.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the sub display device 600 is disposed so as to overlap the front of the main display device 41, and the accessory device 650 is further disposed in front of the sub display device 600. In the accessory device 650, four operation members 651 are rotatably arranged such that an end portion on the sub display device 600 side is pivotally supported by a rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction. The operation member 651 can be converted into a state in which the operation member 651 is substantially horizontal and is stored in the storage unit 652 and retracted from the front of the sub display device 600, and a state in which the operation member 651 is substantially vertical and overlaps the front of the sub display device 600. ing.

  In addition, LEDs 653 are provided on the front surface of the accessory device 650 corresponding to the operation members 651. The sub display device 600 can swing vertically and horizontally by the driving force of the driving source, and is controlled by the effect control device 300 so as to swing in accordance with the operation of the operating member 651. A protection plate for protecting the sub display device 600 from the collision of the operation member 651 is disposed on the front surface of the sub display device 600. In this manner, by arranging the plurality of display devices and the accessory device 650 so as to overlap with each other, it is possible to give a feeling of depth which is poor in the gaming machine, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

  FIG. 125 shows an example of a prefetch notice in the gaming machine having such a configuration. As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the sub display device 600 displays an image that imitates the eyelid as the decorative special figure start memory display 90, and is arranged so as to be positioned above each operation member 651. The state shown in FIG. 125 (a) indicates that there are four startup memories.

  Then, when the predetermined timing at which the pre-reading notice can be executed is reached, as shown in FIG. 125 (b), “That!” Is displayed, which is a pre-reading notice display that instructs the main display device 41 to operate the effect button 25. The When the player operates the effect button 25, the operation member 651 operates as shown in FIG. 125 (c), and overlaps the front of the decorative special figure start memory display 90 positioned above. Further, the LED 653 corresponding to the operating member 651 operated at this time is turned on. The operation member 651 has a flat plate shape with an enlarged tip, and an effect such as hitting a decorative special figure start memory display 90 simulating a heel is performed, and accordingly, the sub display device 600 swings up, down, left and right. .

  The decoration special figure start memory display 90 corresponding to the operated operation member 651 changes its display color as shown in FIG. 125 (d) according to the pre-read result of the corresponding start memory. For example, the high possibility of a special result is indicated by a display color, and the possibility of a special result increases in the order of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. There may be a case where the display color does not change (no pre-reading notice is given).

  If the pre-reading notice is possible, a pre-reading notice display is made as shown in FIG. 125 (e), and when the player operates the effect button 25, the operation member 651 operates as shown in FIG. 125 (f). Thus, an effect is performed in which the decorative special figure start memory display 90 imitating a bag is hit, and the sub display device 600 swings up, down, left and right.

  Here, it is a case where a pre-reading notice is further made for the start memory corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display 90 which has already been pre-readed, and the display color of the decorative special figure start memory display 90 is changed. There may be a case where the display color does not change (the notification content of the pre-reading notice does not change). Of course, it is also possible to make a pre-reading notice for a start-up memory for which a pre-reading notice has not yet been made. In this way, the operation of the accessory device 650 and the notification of information can be linked to produce a highly interesting effect. It should be noted that the operations shown in FIGS. 125C to 125F may be continuously performed by operating the effect button 25 continuously a predetermined number of times or more after the instruction shown in FIG. 125B is received. .

[Pre-reading notice processing]
In order to perform the prefetching notice as described above, the prefetching notice process shown in FIG. 126 is performed in the prior determination process (step D69) in the first scene control process (see FIG. 99). In this prefetching notice process, it is first determined whether or not a prefetching notice is possible (step D171). The state in which the pre-reading notice is possible is a state waiting for the player to operate the effect button 25 as shown in FIG. 125 (b).

  When the pre-reading notice is possible (step D171; Y), the process proceeds to step D175. If the pre-reading notice is not possible (step D171; N), it is determined whether a predetermined notification condition is satisfied (step D172). Arbitrary conditions can be set as the predetermined notification condition, but it must be in a high probability state, a short time state, within a predetermined number of games from the end of the special gaming state, or after the predetermined number of games. The starting memory has reached the upper limit number.

  If the predetermined notification condition is not satisfied (step D172; N), the prefetch notice process is terminated. When a predetermined notification condition is satisfied (step D172; Y), it is determined whether there is a start-up memory that is a target of the prefetch notice (step D173). If there is no start memory to be prefetched (step D173; N), the prefetch notice process is terminated. If there is a start memory to be prefetched (step D173; Y), a prefetch notice display is set (step D174). With the process of setting the pre-reading notice display (step D174), the pre-reading notice display as shown in FIG. 125B is made, and the pre-reading notice ready state waiting for the player to operate the effect button 25 is entered. .

  And it is determined whether there is operation of the production button 25 (step D175). If there is no operation of the effect button 25 (step D175; N), the prefetch notice process is terminated. If there is an operation on the effect button 25 (step D175; Y), the operation of the operation member 651 is set (step D176), and the display content associated with the operation is set (step D177). Further, the operation of the sub display device 600 is set (step D178), and the prefetching notice process is terminated.

  In the process of setting the operation of the operation member 651 (step D176), the rotation operation of the operation member 651 located below the decorative special figure start memory display 90 corresponding to the start memory for performing the pre-reading notice is set. The selection of the start memory for performing the pre-reading notice may be selected by lottery, or may be selected by the pre-reading result. Further, a plurality of operation members 651 may be operated at a time, or may be operated sequentially one by one in addition to the case where they are operated simultaneously.

  Further, in the process of setting the display contents accompanying the operation (step D177), the display setting during the operation of the operation member and the display color after change based on the pre-read information received from the game control device 100 are performed. . In the process of setting the operation of the sub display device 600 (step D178), the swing operation is set according to the operation of the operation member 651.

  Based on the information set here, the pre-reading notice as shown in FIG. 125 is performed by performing necessary processes in the decoration control process (step D13) and the motor / SOL control process (step D14). Become. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an operation control unit that controls the operations of the accessory device 650 and the sub display device 600.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 127, you may make it provide the button corresponding to each operation | movement member as the production | presentation button 25, respectively. As shown in FIG. 127 (a), the effect buttons 25 are provided, for example, around the upper plate 21, arranged in the left-right direction in the same manner as the decorative special figure start memory display 90, and the special special figure start memory display. 90 to one-to-one. Each effect button 25 has a built-in LED 653. For example, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the effect button 25 (in this case, 2 from the right) corresponding to the start memory display of the decoration of the start memory capable of pre-reading notice. The LED 653 of the first effect button 25) is turned on, and a pre-reading notice is performed based on the operation of the effect button 25.

  Further, the start memory that the player wants to make a pre-reading notice may be selected by operating the effect button 25. Examples of the player's operation and action detection means include those that detect the player's operation such as buttons, cross keys, levers, and touch panels, and those that detect the player's action such as an infrared sensor. It is done.

  Based on the above, a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In the gaming machine, a first display device (main display device 41), a second display device (sub-display device 600) arranged to overlap the front of the first display device, and the second display And an accessory device 650 operable in front of the device. Therefore, the interest can be improved by the arrangement of the display device which is not conventional.

  The second display device (sub display device 600) is configured to be operable, and includes an accessory device 650 and an operation control means (production control device 300) for controlling the operation of the second display device. The control means can operate the second display device in accordance with the operation of the accessory device 650. Therefore, interest can be improved by the operation of the display device.

  Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) for storing the start memory of the variable display game up to a predetermined upper limit number, and the result of the variable display game executed in response to the start storage stored in the start storage means, Predetermining means (game control device 100) for determining before execution of the variable display game, and start memory for displaying information about the start memory stored in the start memory means on the second display device (sub display device 600) Display means (production control device 300), and the start-up storage display means can display the determination result by the prior determination means in accordance with the operation of the accessory device 650. Therefore, interest can be improved by the operation of the accessory device and the notification of information being linked.

  Further, the start memory display means (production control device 300) notifies the presence of the corresponding start memory by the start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display 90) corresponding one-to-one with the start memory, and about the start memory. It is configured to perform the determination result by the prior determination means (game control device 100) in the corresponding start memory display, and the accessory device 650 is disposed corresponding to each position where the start memory display can be displayed. Can be converted into a state retracted from the front of the second display device (sub display device 600) and a state overlapping the front, and the start storage display means is a state where the accessory device 650 overlaps the front of the second display device. On the basis of having operated, the determination result by the prior determination means can be displayed in the start memory display corresponding to the operated accessory device 650.

  Therefore, interest can be improved by interlocking the operation of the accessory device 650 and the notification of information. In particular, since the notification target can be clarified, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking.

  Also, in a gaming machine that executes a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result , A display device (main display device 41 or sub display device 600) for displaying information relating to the game, an accessory device 650 operable in front of the display device, and a starting memory of the variable display game are stored up to a predetermined upper limit number. Controls the operation of the start storage means (game control device 100), the start storage display means (effect control device 300) for displaying information about the start storage stored in the start storage means on the display device, and the accessory device 650. Operation control means (production control device 300), and the start memory display means is based on a start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display 90) corresponding to the start memory one-on-one. The presence of the corresponding start memory is notified, and the accessory device 650 is arranged corresponding to each position where the start memory display can be displayed, and is in a state where it is retracted from the front of the display device and in a state where it overlaps the front. The start memory display means can change the display mode of the start memory display corresponding to the operated accessory device 650 in accordance with the operation of the accessory device 650. Therefore, interest can be improved by the operation of the accessory device and the notification of information being linked.

  In addition, prior determination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining the result of the variable display game executed in response to the start storage stored in the start storage means (game control apparatus 100) before the execution of the variable display game. And the start memory display means (production control device 300) operates the accessory device 650 based on the fact that the accessory device 650 is moved to the front of the display device (the main display device 41 or the sub display device 600). In the start memory display corresponding to 650, it is possible to display the determination result by the prior determination means for the start memory corresponding to the start memory display. Therefore, interest can be improved by interlocking the operation of the accessory device 650 and the notification of information.

  Further, a detection means (effect button switch 25a) capable of detecting the player's operation or action is provided, and the action control means (effect control device 300) selects the accessory device 650 to be operated based on the detection result of the detection means. It will be like that. Therefore, it becomes possible to select the accessory device to be operated according to the player's intention and the start-up memory display to change the display mode, and the interest can be improved.

  Here, examples of the detecting means include a device that detects a player's operation such as a button, a cross key, a lever, and a touch panel, and a device that detects a player's operation such as an infrared sensor.

  As shown in FIG. 128, even when the sub display device 600 is not provided, a similar prefetch notice can be executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display 90 is displayed at the lower part of the main display device 41, and the accessory device 650 is arranged so that the operation member 651 is arranged correspondingly. Arrange. Then, by operating the operation member 651 as shown in FIG. 128 (b), it overlaps the corresponding decorative special figure start memory display 90 in the main display device 41, and the display color is changed as shown in FIG. 128 (c). Make a pre-reading notice. The main display device 41 may swing in response to the operation of the operation member 651.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 129, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting the result of the special figure variation display game being executed instead of the prefetching notice. As shown in FIG. 129 (a), the sub display device 600 is arranged in front of the right part of the main display device 41, and the accessory device 650 including the operation member 651 is arranged correspondingly. Further, the decoration special figure start memory display 90 is displayed at a position below the main display device 41 and at a position where the sub display device 600 does not overlap. In the decorative special figure start memory display 90, the corresponding operation member 651 is not arranged, but the pre-reading notice by changing the display mode can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (a), at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the decorative special figure start memory display 90 corresponding to the start memory for executing the special figure fluctuation display game is moved to the sub display device 600. In the sub display device 600, the decoration special figure start memory display 90 that has moved changes to a suggestion display 95 that suggests the content of the special figure variation display game being executed. As shown in FIG. 129, the suggestion display 95 is an image imitating a bag, and as shown in FIG. 129 (c), a display prompting the operation of the effect button 25 is made at a predetermined timing in the special figure variation display game.

  When the player operates the effect button 25, the operation member 651 operates as shown in FIG. 129 (d) and overlaps the front of the suggestion display 95 positioned above. At this time, the LED 653 of the accessory device 650 is turned on. Accordingly, the sub display device 600 swings up, down, left and right. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (e), the display color of the suggestion display 95 changes. Here, for example, the high possibility of a special result is indicated by a display color, and the possibility of a special result increases in the order of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. There may be a case where the display color does not change (no pre-reading notice is given). In addition, as shown in FIG. 125, an operation member 651 corresponding to each decorative special figure start memory display 90 may be provided so that a pre-reading notice by the operation of the operation member 651 can be executed.

[Eighth Modification]
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The gaming machine of this modification includes an accessory device 670 in front of the sub display device 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the center case 40 includes a main display device 41, a sub display device 600 arranged in front of the upper portion of the main display device 41, and the sub display. The accessory device 670 is provided so as to overlap the front of the device 600. As shown in FIGS. 130 (b) and 130 (c), in the accessory device, a logo portion 671 shaped like “ZERO” is formed of a transparent lens member. The display on the screen appears to expand.

  In FIG. 130 (a), a display simulating flame is performed on the sub display device 600, and this display is in an enlarged state at the logo portion 671. Further, portions other than the logo portion 671 are made of an opaque material so that the sub display device 600 is not visible. Furthermore, a plurality of LEDs 672 are disposed around the front surface of the accessory device 670.

  Further, the sub display device 600 is movable up and down, and is located behind the accessory device 670 as shown in FIG. 130 (a) and below the accessory device 670 as shown in FIG. 131 (a). It can be converted into an exposed state. In FIG. 131 (a), a notification for instructing to make a right turn is performed on the exposed sub display device 600.

  Further, the accessory device 670 is divided into a left member 673 and a right member 674, and each of them can move left and right. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the left member 673 and the right member 674 are joined at the center, and as shown in FIG. 131 (b), the left member 673 and the right member 674 move sideways. The rear sub display device 600 can be converted into an exposed state. In FIG. 131 (b), it is informed that there is a high possibility that the special figure variation display game being executed will have a special result.

  Note that the operations of the left member 673, the right member 674, and the sub display device 600 can be performed independently, and various operations can be performed by combining the operations. These operations are controlled by the production control device 300 according to the gaming state.

  FIG. 132 shows an example of continuous effects over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games. Here, the example which performs a continuous effect for the start memory digested 3rd was shown. As shown in FIG. 132 (a), in the state where the continuous effect is not executed, the sub display device 600 performs white display, and the display color of the logo portion 671 of the accessory device 670 is white. In this case, in the decorative special figure start memory display 90 corresponding to the start memory to be continuously produced, the pre-reading notice is performed by changing the display mode, but it may not be performed.

  At the start of the special figure fluctuation display game which is the first of the continuous effects, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), the decorative special figure start memory display 90 corresponding to the start memory for executing the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed on the accessory device. Move towards 670. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 132C, the sub display device 600 is displayed in blue, and the display color of the logo portion 671 of the accessory device 670 is blue.

  At the start of the special figure variation display game which is the second of the continuous effects, as shown in FIG. 132 (d), a decorative special figure start memory display 90 corresponding to the start memory for executing the special figure variation display game is displayed as an accessory device. Move towards 670. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 132 (e), the sub display device 600 is displayed in green, and the display color of the logo portion 671 of the accessory device 670 is green.

  At the start of the special figure variation display game which is the third continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 132 (f), the decorative special figure start memory display 90 corresponding to the start memory for executing the special figure variation display game is displayed as the accessory device. Move towards 670. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 132 (g), the sub display device 600 is displayed in red, and the display color of the logo portion 671 of the accessory device 670 is red.

  In this way, the effect of changing the display color of the logo portion 671 of the accessory device 670 is temporarily stopped after a temporary stop in a result mode other than the special result mode in the decorative special map display game in the middle of the special map display game. You may make it perform in the so-called pseudo | simulation continuous variation display mode which performs the re-variation display which starts a variation display once or more. In this case, the moving display of the decoration special figure start memory display 90 is not performed, and the display color of the logo portion 671 is changed every time re-variation is started.

  FIG. 133 shows an example in which the accessory device 650 of the seventh modified example described above is provided and prefetching notice is performed. As shown in FIG. 133 (a), when the pre-reading notice is not executed, the sub display device 600 performs white display, and the display color of the logo portion 671 of the accessory device 670 is white. In the case of performing the pre-reading notice, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the target operating member 651 operates and overlaps in front of the decoration special figure start memory display 90 positioned above, and accordingly, the decoration special figure start is started. The memory display 90 moves toward the accessory device 670.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 133C, a display imitating a flame is performed on the sub display device 600, and the logo portion 671 can be visually recognized. In the decorative special figure start memory display 90 corresponding to the target start memory, a pre-reading notice is made by changing the display mode. In addition, the display color of the display imitating the flame in the logo portion 671 and the display color of the decoration special figure start memory display 90 are changed depending on the high possibility of a special result, for example, blue, The possibility of special results in the order of green, red, and rainbow increases.

  Based on the above, a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In the gaming machine, a first display device (main display device 41), a second display device (sub-display device 600) arranged to overlap the front of the first display device, and the second display And an accessory device 670 arranged so as to overlap the front of the device.

  In addition, the second display device (sub display device 600) is configured to be operable at a position that does not overlap with the accessory device 670. Further, the accessory device 670 is configured to be operable at a position that does not overlap the second display device (sub display device 600). In addition, the accessory device 670 includes a see-through portion (logo portion 671) through which the display of the sub display device 600 located behind can be seen. In addition, the see-through portion (logo portion 671) is configured by a lens member capable of enlarging the display of the sub display device 600 located at the rear.

  Note that the configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications are applicable to a slot machine. For example, the configuration of the above-described embodiment and each modified example can be adopted as the configuration of the display device provided above the reel that variably displays the identification information. In addition to this, the configuration of the above-described embodiment and each modified example is adopted in a slanting portion that is inclined forward to place a medal insertion portion or the like in a slot machine, or in and around a lower plate that stores paid-out medals. It is also possible.

  For example, the operable sub-display device 600 is tilted forward such that the periphery of the display device provided above the reel that displays the identification information in a variable manner, the medal insertion portion positioned around the reel, or below the reel is arranged. It is possible to provide it in the inclined part, the decorative panel part located below the inclined part, the inside of the lower plate for storing the paid-out medal, the peripheral part, and the like.

[Ninth Modification]
Next, a ninth modification of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display 90.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the decoration special figure start memory display 90 includes a storable display 91 indicating that the start memory can be stored, and a storage display 92 indicating the presence of the start memory. The memorable display 91 is plate-shaped and has a circular recess at the center. The memory display 92 is spherical and is displayed above the recess of the memorizable display 91. When the start memory is not generated, only the storable display 91 is displayed. When the start memory is generated, the memory display 92 is displayed from the recess of the storable display 91.

  Further, the first start memory and the second start memory can be identified by changing display colors. In the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, since it is not determined which start memory will be generated next, the display color of the storable display 91 is set as a display color that is neither one display color nor any display color, When the start memory is generated, the display color is changed to the corresponding one.

  FIG. 135 shows a display example on a gaming machine in which the first start memory and the second start memory are alternately generated. This gaming machine has a first start port provided with a start port 1 switch 36a and a second start port provided with a start port 2 switch 37a, and a game ball is first started upstream of these start ports. A distribution member that alternately distributes the mouth and the second start port is provided.

  FIG. 135 (a) shows a state where there is one first start memory and one second start memory. The decorative special figure start memory display 90 is displayed so as to be arranged in the order of occurrence from the left. Further, a storable display 91 corresponding to the type of storage that is sequentially generated by the startable storage that can be stored is displayed. When the earliest start-up memory is consumed, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), the memory display 92 and the memorizable display 91 corresponding to the start-up memory disappear and the whole is shifted to the left and newly stored at the right end. A possible display 91 is added.

  FIG. 136 shows an example in which the same type of start-up memory is continuously generated for some reason. In this case, as shown in FIG. 136 (a), the second storable display 91 from the left, which is the storable display 91 of the type that did not occur, is skipped, and the storable display 91 of the corresponding type located next to it. A memory display 92 is displayed on the top. If a start memory of a type that did not occur after that occurs, the start memory is displayed in the order of digestion. Therefore, the memorized display 91 is displayed on the second memorable display 91 from the left which is the skipped memorable display 91. Instead, the storage display 92 is displayed on the fourth storable display 91 from the left. Further, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), the storable display 91 of the type that did not occur may be deleted.

  In addition, in the gaming machine in which only the second start memory is generated in the short time state, the measurable display 91 corresponding to the first start memory is not displayed as shown in FIG. Only the storable display 91 may be displayed.

  The gaming machine 10 as described above executes a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. A plurality of display devices (main display device 41, sub display device 600) capable of displaying information related to a game, and display control means (effect control device) for controlling display on the plurality of display devices. 300), and the display control means can display the specific display so as to move among the plurality of display devices.

  Here, the gaming machines include all gaming machines that use gaming balls such as pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, slot machines that use medals, slot machines that use gaming balls, etc. All slot machines are included. Examples of the display device include a display device using liquid crystal, LED, EL, or the like.

  Therefore, an unprecedented effect that a specific display moves between a plurality of display devices can be performed, and the interest can be improved.

  Further, the display control means (production control device 300) includes display selection means for selecting a specific display from a plurality of types of display. Therefore, the specific display can be selected from various ones, and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, a detection means (production button switch 25a) capable of detecting the player's operation or action is provided, and the display selection means (production control device 300) can select a specific display based on the detection result of the detection means. Therefore, a specific display can be selected from various ones according to the player's intention, and the interest can be improved.

  Here, examples of the detecting means include a device that detects a player's operation such as a button, a cross key, a lever, and a touch panel, and a device that detects a player's operation such as an infrared sensor.

  In addition, at least one display device (sub display device 600) is configured to be operable, and includes operation control means (effect control device 300) capable of operating the operable display device, and display selection means (effect control). The device 300) can select a specific display based on the position to which the display device has moved.

  Therefore, since a specific display associated with the position of the display device can be selected, it is possible to improve the interest.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

  Further, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 25a production button switch (detection means)
41 Main display device (display device)
300 Production control device (display control means, operation control means)
600 Sub display device (display device)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result,
A first display device and a second display device capable of displaying information about a game;
Display control means for controlling display on the first display device and the second display device,
In the variable display game, the display control means
The variable display game is displayed on the first display device, and the first mode of displaying a predetermined image related to the variable display game on the second display device is executed, and then displayed on the second display device. and the predetermined image while moving in the first display device, the first display device the variable display game that has been displayed on the move to the second display device, displays the then on the second display device The second mode of moving the variable display game to the first display device is executed, and the variable display game displayed on the first display device at the start of the variable display game is displayed on the first display device. And the first effect of ending the variable display game,
A second effect of ending the variable display game in a state where the variable display game is displayed on the first display device without executing the second aspect after executing the first aspect;
Can produce any of the following
The gaming machine , wherein the first effect or the second effect is executed according to an expected value at which the variable display game has the special result .

Images